+

US20070135464A1 - Antiinflammation agents - Google Patents

Antiinflammation agents Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20070135464A1
US20070135464A1 US11/650,268 US65026807A US2007135464A1 US 20070135464 A1 US20070135464 A1 US 20070135464A1 US 65026807 A US65026807 A US 65026807A US 2007135464 A1 US2007135464 A1 US 2007135464A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
group
cycloalkyl
compound
heteroalkyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/650,268
Inventor
Michelle Browner
David Clark
Timothy Cushing
Xiaolin Hao
Ronald Hawley
Xiao He
Juan Jaen
Sharada Labadie
Marie-Louise Smith
Francisco Talamas
Nigel Walker
Marc Labelle
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Amgen Inc
Original Assignee
Amgen Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Amgen Inc filed Critical Amgen Inc
Priority to US11/650,268 priority Critical patent/US20070135464A1/en
Publication of US20070135464A1 publication Critical patent/US20070135464A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/02—Nasal agents, e.g. decongestants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/04—Antipruritics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06—Antipsoriatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/06—Antigout agents, e.g. antihyperuricemic or uricosuric agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/16—Otologicals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06—Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • Tumor Necrosis Factor TNF
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • TNF Tumor Necrosis Factor
  • IL-1 interleukin-1
  • cytokines Physiologically, they produce many of the same proinflammatory responses, including fever, sleep and anorexia, mobilization and activation of polymorphonuclear leukocytes, induction of cyclooxygenase and lipoxygenase enzymes, increase in adhesion molecule expression, activation of B-cells, T-cells and natural killer cells, and stimulation of production of other cytokines.
  • Other actions include a contribution to the tissue degeneration seen in chronic inflammatory conditions, such as stimulation of fibroblast proliferation, induction of collagenase, etc. They have also been implicated in the process of bone resorption and adipose tissue regulation.
  • these cytokines play key roles in a large number of pathological conditions, including rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, diabetes, obesity, bone mass loss, cancer, neurological conditions such as ischemic stroke or closed head injuries, etc.
  • Cytokines trigger a variety of changes in gene expression in their target cells by binding and activating their respective cognate receptors. Receptor activation sets in motion certain biochemical events, including the activation of otherwise latent transcription factors. Members of the NF- ⁇ B Rel family of transcription factors represent some of the most prominent of these transcription factors, having been implicated in the regulation of genes involved in inflammation, cell proliferation, apoptosis, and several other basic cellular functions (Verma et al. Genes Dev. 9, 2723 (1995); Baichwal & Baeuerle, Curr. Biol. 7, 94 (1997)).
  • NF- ⁇ B The best studied member of this family of transcription factors is NF- ⁇ B, which generally exists in cells as a heterodimer of two proteins: p50 (NF- ⁇ B1) and p65 (RelA), although homodimers of these individual components are also possible (Baeuerle and Baltimore, Cell, 53, 211 (1988); Baeuerle and Henkel, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 12, 141 (1994)).
  • NF- ⁇ B in its inactive form, resides in the cytoplasm of cells.
  • stimuli such as proinflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNF and IL-1), ultraviolet irradiation and viral infection (Verma, 1995; Baichwal, 1997; Cao et al.
  • NF- ⁇ B migrates to the nucleus.
  • TNF and IL-1 have been shown to be two key proinflammation agents in a wide variety of pathological conditions, including rheumatoid arthritis, septic shock, inflammatory bowel disease, dermal sensitization disorders, neurological trauma such as stroke or closed-head injuries, etc.
  • the NF- ⁇ B heterodimer In its inactive state, the NF- ⁇ B heterodimer is held in the cytoplasm by association with inhibitory IkB proteins. Recently, the three-dimensional structure of a NF- ⁇ B/I ⁇ B ternary complex has been solved (Huxford et al. Cell, 95, 759 (1998); Jacobs et al. Cell, 95, 749 (1998)).
  • the appropriate stimuli such as IL-1 or TNF
  • intracellular signal transduction pathways are activated that lead to the eventual phosphorylation of IkB proteins on two specific residues (serines 32 and 36 in IkB ⁇ , serines 19 and 23 in IkB ⁇ ).
  • IKK ⁇ and IKK ⁇ Two IKK enzymes, generally referred to as IKK ⁇ and IKK ⁇ (Woronicz et al. Science, 278, 866 (1997); Zandi et al. Cell, 91, 243 (1997)) or IKK-1 and IKK-2 (Mercurio et al. Science, 278, 860 (1997)) have been discovered. Both forms of IKK can exist as homodimers and as IKK ⁇ /IKK ⁇ heterodimers.
  • IkB kinase complex Another recently discovered component of the IkB kinase complex is a regulatory protein, known as IKK-gamma or NEMO (NF- ⁇ B-Essential Modulator) (Rothwarf et al. Nature, 395, 297 (1998)).
  • NEMO NF- ⁇ B-Essential Modulator
  • IKK-gamma or NEMO NF- ⁇ B-Essential Modulator
  • IKK ⁇ and IKK ⁇ have very similar primary structures, displaying more than 50% overall sequence identity. In the kinase domain, their sequences are 65% identical.
  • the present invention provides compounds useful in the treatment of inflammatory, metabolic or malignant conditions, having the formula:
  • W and X independently represent N or CH; Y represents O, S or N(R), wherein R is H, CN, NO 2 , (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )alkenyl or (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl; and Z represents H, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl or NR 2 R 3 .
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently H, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 10 )heteroalkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, aryl(C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, heteroaryl(C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, or perfluoro(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl.
  • R 2 and R 3 can be combined to form a heterocyclic 5- to 7-membered ring.
  • R 4 represents H, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 7 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl or (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl.
  • the letter A represents a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the A ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are five- or six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated.
  • the letter B represents a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, perfluoro(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl, (C 1 -C 6 )alkoxy, (C 1 -C 6 )thioalkoxy, amino, (C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino, di(C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino, (C 3 -C 10 )Cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 3
  • the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more compounds of formula I in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • the present invention provides methods for the treatment of an inflammatory, metabolic or malignant condition, comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment a compound of formula I.
  • “Acyl” means the group —C(O)R′, where R′ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aryl-alkyl, and variations of these groups in which one or more carbon atoms have been rep laced with heteroatoms.
  • Alkyl means a linear saturated monovalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched saturated monovalent hydrocarbon radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix.
  • (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl is meant to include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, 2-propyl, tert-butyl, pentyl and the like.
  • alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, aralkyloxy when a prefix is not included to indicate the number of main chain carbon atoms in an alkyl portion, the radical or portion thereof will have six or fewer main chain carbon atoms.
  • heteroalkyl refers to an alkyl group having the indicated number of carbon atoms, in which some of the attached hydrogen atoms have been replaced with fluorine atoms, in a number ranging from 1 to the maximal number of hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group.
  • Alkylene means a linear saturated divalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched saturated divalent hydrocarbon radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix.
  • (C 1 -C 6 )alkylene is meant to include methylene, ethylene, propylene, 2-methylpropylene, pentylene, and the like.
  • Alkenyl means a linear monovalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched monovalent hydrocarbon radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix and containing at least one double bond.
  • (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl is meant to include, ethenyl, propenyl, and the like.
  • Alkynyl means a linear monovalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched monovalent hydrocarbon radical containing at least one triple bond and having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix.
  • (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl is meant to include ethynyl propynyl and the like.
  • Alkoxy means a radical —OR where R is an alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl respectively, as defined herein, e.g., methoxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, pyridin-2-ylmethyloxy, and the like.
  • Alkoxycarbonylalkyl means a radical —R a C(O)R b where R a is an alkylene group as defined above and R b is an alkoxy group as defined above, e.g., methoxycarbonylethyl, ethoxycarbonylbutyl, and the like.
  • Aryl means a monovalent monocyclic or bicyclic aromatic hydrocarbon radical of 6 to 10 ring atoms which is substituted independently with one to four substituents, preferably one, two, or three substituents selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, heteroalkyl, COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), —(CR′R′′) n —COOR (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R′′ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenyl
  • Alkyl means a radical —R a R b where R a is an alkylene group (having six or fewer main chain carbon atoms) and R b is an aryl group as defined herein, e.g., benzyl, phenylethyl 3-(3-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpentyl and the like.
  • Alkenyl means a radical —R a R b where R a is an alkenylene group and R b is an aryl group as defined herein, e.g., 3-phenyl-2-propenyl, and the like.
  • Arylheteroalkyl means a radical —R a R b where R a is an heteroalkylene group and R b is an aryl group as defined herein, e.g., 2-hydroxy-2-phenyl-ethyl, 2-hydroxy-1-hydroxymethyl-2-phenyl-ethyl, and the like.
  • Cycloalkyl means a saturated monovalent cyclic hydrocarbon radical of three to seven ring carbons.
  • the cycloalkyl may be optionally substituted independently with one, two, or three substituents selected from alkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or —C(O)R (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, hydroxy, alkoxy, or optionally substituted phenyl).
  • cycloalkyl includes, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, phenylcyclohexyl, 4-carboxycyclohexyl, 2-carboxamidocyclohexyl, 2-dimethylaminocarbonyl-cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • Cycloalkyl-alkyl means a radical —R a R b where R a is an alkylene group and R b is a cycloalkyl group as defined herein, e.g., cyclopropylmethyl, cyclohexylpropyl, 3-cyclohexyl-2-methylpropyl, and the like.
  • the prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms e.g., C 4 -C 10 ) refers to the total number of carbon atoms from both the cycloalkyl portion and the alkyl portion.
  • Haloalkyl means alkyl substituted with one or more same or different halo atoms, e.g., —CH 2 Cl, —CF 3 , —CH 2 CF 3 , —CH 2 CCl 3 , and the like, and further includes those alkyl groups such as perfluoroalkyl in which all hydrogen atoms are replaced by fluorine atoms.
  • halo and the term “halogen” when used to describe a substituent, refer to —F, —Cl, —Br and —I.
  • Heteroalkyl means an alkyl radical as defined herein with one, two or three substituents independently selected from cyano, —OR a , —NR b R c , and —S(O) n R d (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), with the understanding that the point of attachment of the heteroalkyl radical is through a carbon atom of the heteroalkyl radical.
  • R a is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, carboxamido, or mono- or di-alkylcarbamoyl.
  • R b is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl or aralkyl.
  • R c is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, carboxamido, mono- or di-alkylcarbamoyl or alkylsulfonyl.
  • R d is hydrogen (provided that n is 0), alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, amino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, or hydroxyalkyl.
  • Representative examples include, for example, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 2-methoxyethyl, benzyloxymethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, and 2-methylsulfonyl-ethyl.
  • R a , R b ,R c , and R d can be further substituted by NH 2 , fluorine, alkylamino, di-alkylamino, OH or alkoxy.
  • the prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms refers to the total number of carbon atoms in the portion of the heteroalkyl group exclusive of the cyano, —OR a , —NR b R c , or —S(O) n R d portions.
  • Heteroaryl means a monovalent monocyclic or bicyclic radical of 5 to 12 ring atoms having at least one aromatic ring containing one, two, or three ring heteroatoms selected from N, O, or S, the remaining ring atoms being C, with the understanding that the attachment point of the heteroaryl radical will be on an aromatic ring.
  • the heteroaryl ring is optionally substituted independently with one to four substituents, preferably one or two substituents, selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, heteroalkyl, —COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl, —(CR′R′′) n —COOR (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R′′ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), or —(CR′R′′) n -CONR a R b (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′
  • heteroaryl includes, but is not limited to, pyridyl, furanyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, triazolyl, imidazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, benzofuranyl, tetrahydrobenzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoisothiazolyl, benzotriazolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, isoquinolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzisoxazolyl or benzothienyl, and the derivatives thereof.
  • Heteroaralkyl means a radical —R a R b where R a is an alkylene group and R b is a heteroaryl group as defined herein, e.g., pyridin-3-ylmethyl, 3-(benzofuran-2-yl)propyl, and the like.
  • Heteroaralkenyl means a radical —R a R b where R a is an alkenylene group and R b is a heteroaryl group as defined herein, e.g., 3-(pyridin-3-yl)propen-2-yl, and the like.
  • Heterocyclyl or “cycloheteroalkyl” means a saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic cyclic radical of 3 to 8 ring atoms in which one or two ring atoms are heteroatoms selected from O, NR (where R is independently hydrogen or alkyl) or S(O) n (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), the remaining ring atoms being C, where one or two C atoms may optionally be replaced by a carbonyl group.
  • the heterocyclyl ring may be optionally substituted independently with one, two, or three substituents selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, —COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), —(CR′R′′) n —COOR (n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R′′ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), or —(CR′R′′) n —CONR a R b (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′
  • heterocyclyl includes, but is not limited to, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidino, N-methylpiperidin-3-yl, piperazino, N-methylpyrrolidin-3-yl, 3-pyrrolidino, 2-pyrrolidon-1-yl, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-1-oxide, thiomorpholino-1,1-dioxide, pyrrolidinyl, and the derivatives thereof.
  • the prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms refers to the total number of carbon atoms in the portion of the cycloheteroalkyl or heterocyclyl group exclusive of the number of heteroatoms.
  • Heterocyclylalkyl or “Cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl” means a radical —R a R b where R a is an alkylene group and R b is a heterocyclyl group as defined herein, e.g., tetrahydropyran-2-ylmethyl, 4-methylpiperazin-1-ylethyl, 3-piperidinylmethyl, and the like.
  • Heteroalkylene means a linear saturated divalent hydrocarbon radical of one to six carbons or a branched saturated hydrocarbon radical of three to six carbon atoms with one, two or three substituents independently selected from —OR a , —NR b R c , and —S(O) n R d (where n is an integer from 0 to 2) where, R a , Rb, Rc, and R d are as defined herein for a heteroalkyl radical. Examples include, 2-hydroxyethan-1,2-diyl, 2-hydroxypropan-1,3-diyl and the like.
  • Heteroalkyl substituted cycloalkyl means a cycloalkyl group wherein one, two, or three hydrogen atoms are replaced independently by heteroalkyl groups, with the understanding that the heteroalkyl group is attached to the cycloalkyl group via a carbon-carbon bond. Examples include 1-hydroxymethyl-cyclopent-1-yl, 2-hydroxymethyl-cyclohex-2-yl and the like.
  • Heteroalkyl substituted heterocycly means a heterocyclyl group wherein one, two, or three hydrogen atoms are replaced independently by heteroalkyl groups, with the understanding that the heteroalkyl group is attached to the heterocyclyl group via a carbon-carbon bond. Examples include 4-hydroxymethyl-piperidin-1-yl, and the like.
  • “Hydroxyalkyl” means an alkyl radical as defined herein, substituted with one or more, preferably one, two or three hydroxy groups, provided that the same carbon atom does not carry more than one hydroxy group.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 1-hydroxymethyl-2-methylpropyl, 2-hydroxybutyl, 3-hydroxybutyl, 4-hydroxybutyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 1-hydroxymethyl-2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxybutyl, 3,4dihydroxybutyl and 2-hydroxymethyl-3-hydroxypropyl, preferably 2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl and 1-hydroxymethyl-2-hydroxyethyl. Accordingly, as used herein, the term “hydroxyalkyl” is used to define a subset of heteroalkyl groups.
  • Optionally substituted phenyl means a phenyl ring which is optionally substituted independently with one to four substituents, preferably one or two substituents selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, heteroalkyl, —COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl, —(CR′R′′) n —COOR (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R′′ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), or —CR′R′′) n —CONR a R b (where
  • modulate refers to the ability of a compound to increase or decrease the function and/or expression of IKK, where IKK function may include kinase activity and/or protein-binding. Modulation may occur in vitro or in vivo. Modulation, as described herein, includes the inhibition or activation of IKK function and/or the downregulation or upregulation of IKK expression, either directly or indirectly.
  • a modulator preferably activates IKK function and/or upregulates IKK expression. More preferably, a modulator activates or inhibits IKK function and/or upregulates or downregulates IKK expression. Most preferably, a modulator inhibits IKK function and/or downregulates IKK expression.
  • the ability of a compound to inhibit IKK function can be demonstrated in an enzymatic assay or a cell-based assay (e.g., inhibition of IL-1-stimulated NF- ⁇ B activation).
  • Leaving group has the meaning conventionally associated with it in synthetic organic chemistry i.e., an atom or group capable of being displaced by a nucleophile and includes halo (such as chloro, bromo, iodo), alkanesulfonyloxy, arenesulfonyloxy, alkylcarbonyloxy (e.g., acetoxy), arylcarbonyloxy, mesyloxy, tosyloxy, trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy, aryloxy (e.g., 2,4-dinitrophenoxy), methoxy, N,O- dimethylhydroxylamino, and the like.
  • halo such as chloro, bromo, iodo
  • alkanesulfonyloxy arenesulfonyloxy
  • alkylcarbonyloxy e.g., acetoxy
  • arylcarbonyloxy mesyloxy, tosyloxy, trifluoromethan
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient” means a carrier or excipient that is useful in preparing a pharmaceutical composition that is generally safe, non-toxic and neither biologically nor otherwise undesirable, and includes a carrier or excipient that is acceptable for veterinary use as well as human pharmaceutical use.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient” as used in the specification and claims includes both one and more than one such carrier or excipient.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound means a salt that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound.
  • Such salts include:
  • acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-napthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid
  • a metal ion e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion
  • organic base such as ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, trimethylamine, N-methylglucamine, and the like.
  • Prodrugs means any compound which releases an active parent drug according to formula I in vivo when such prodrug is administered to a mammalian subject.
  • Prodrugs of a compound of formula I are prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compound of formula I in such a way that the modifications may be cleaved in vivo to release the parent compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds of formula I wherein a hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group in a compound of formula I is bonded to any group that may be cleaved in vivo to regenerate the free hydroxyl, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • prodrugs include, but are not limited to esters (e.g., acetate, formate, and benzoate derivatives), carbamates (e.g., N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl) of hydroxy functional groups in compounds of formula I, and the like.
  • esters e.g., acetate, formate, and benzoate derivatives
  • carbamates e.g., N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl
  • Protecting group refers to a grouping of atoms that when attached to a reactive group in a molecule masks, reduces or prevents that reactivity. Examples of protecting groups can be found in T. W. Greene and P. G. Futs, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, (Wiley, 2nd ed. 1991) and Harrison and Harrison et al., Compendium of Synthetic Organic Methods, Vols. 1-8 (John Wiley and Sons. 1971-1996).
  • Representative amino protecting groups include formyl, acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, benzyl, benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc), trimethyl silyl (TMS), 2-trimethylsilyl-ethanesulfonyl (SES), trityl and substituted trityl groups, alkyloxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (FMOC), nitro-veratryloxycarbonyl (NVOC) and the like.
  • hydroxy protecting groups include those where the hydroxy group is either acylated or alkylated such as benzyl and trityl ethers as well as alkyl ethers, tetrahydropyranyl ethers, trialkylsilyl ethers and allyl ethers.
  • Treating” or “treatment” of a disease includes:
  • IKK-mediated condition or disease refers to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, IKK activity. Inappropriate IKK functional activity might arise as the result of IKK expression in cells which normally do not express IKK, increased IKK expression (leading to, e.g., inflammatory and immunoregulatory disorders and diseases) or decreased IKK expression.
  • An IKK-mediated condition or disease may be completely or partially mediated by inappropriate IKK functional activity.
  • an IKK-mediated condition or disease is one in which modulation of IKK results in some effect on the underlying condition or disorder (e.g., an IKK inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • therapeutically effective amount means the amount of the subject compound that will elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, animal or human that is being sought by the researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician. “A therapeutically effective amount” includes the amount of a compound that, when administered to a mammal for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease. The “therapeutically effective amount” will vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity and the age, weight, etc., of the mammal to be treated.
  • heterocyclo group optionally mono- or di-substituted with an alkyl group means that the alkyl may but need not be present, and the description includes situations where the heterocyclo group is mono- or disubstituted with an alkyl group and situations where the heterocyclo group is not substituted with the alkyl group.
  • isomers Compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “isomers”. Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers”. Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed “diastereomers” and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed “enantiomers”. When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible.
  • An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or ( ⁇ )-isomers respectively).
  • a chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a “racemic mixture”.
  • the compounds of this invention may exist in stereoisomeric form if they possess one or more asymmetric centers or a double bond with asymmetric substitution and, therefore, can be produced as individual stereoisomers or as mixtures. Unless otherwise indicated, the description is intended to include individual stereoisomers as well as mixtures.
  • the methods for the determination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers are well-known in the art (see discussion in Chapter 4 of “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 4th edition J. March, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1992).
  • the compounds of the present invention can also be produced in radiolabeled form and are useful in assays for evaluating the binding capabilities of compounds that interact with IKK ⁇ and with IKK ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides compounds useful in the treatment of inflammatory, metabolic or malignant conditions, having the formula:
  • W and X independently represent N or CH; Y represents O, S or N(R), wherein R is H, CN, NO 2 , (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )alkenyl or (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl; and Z represents H, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl or NR 2 R 3 .
  • R 1 , R 2 and R 3 are independently H, (C 1 -C 10 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 10 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 10 )heteroalkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, aryl(C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, heteroaryl(C 1 C 4 )heteroalkyl or perfluoro(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl.
  • R 2 and R 3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl ring.
  • the symbol R 4 represents H, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 7 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl or (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl.
  • the letter A represents a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the A ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are five- or six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated.
  • the letter A represents a fused ring selected from: wherein R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 are independently selected from H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl, (C 1 -C 6 )alkoxy, (C 1 -C 6 )thioalkoxy, amino, (C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino, di(C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, cyano, nitro, (C 5 , R
  • any of the R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 groups can be optionally substituted by 1 to 3 of the following: CN, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl-SO 2 , (C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl-SO 2 , CONH 2 , CO—NH—(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, CO—N[(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl] 2 , SO 2 NH 2 , SO 2 NH—(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, or SO 2 N—[(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl] 2 .
  • the letter B represents a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, perfluoro(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl, (C 1 -C 6 )alkoxy, (C 1 -C 6 )thioalkoxy, amino, (C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino, di(C 1 -C 6 )alkylamino, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 3
  • B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule or a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule. More preferably, B is selected from substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
  • B is selected from 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
  • W is N and X is CH.
  • Y is preferably O or S.
  • R 4 is H or CH 3 .
  • A is selected from: wherein the symbols R 5 , R 6 and R 7 have the meanings provided above, and R 8 is H.
  • B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule. More preferably, B is substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
  • B is selected from 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
  • W is N and X is CH.
  • Y is preferably O or S. More preferably, Z is NR 2 R 3 .
  • W is N and X is N. In still another group of embodiments, W is CH and X is N. In yet another group of embodiments, W and X are both CH.
  • Y is S; Z is NH2; and R 1 is (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl or (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl.
  • preferred groups for each of A and B are the same as have been described above.
  • Y is S; Z is NH 2 ; and R 1 is CH 3 .
  • preferred groups for each of A and B are the same as have been described above.
  • W is N;
  • X is CH;
  • Y is O or S;
  • Z is H, CH 3 , NH 2 or NHCH 3 ;
  • R 1 is H, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 1 -C 10 )heteroalkyl, (C 4 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl, aryl(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, aryl(C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, heteroaryl(C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, or perfluoro(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl;
  • R 4 is H;
  • A represents wherein R 6 and R 7 are independently selected from H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl
  • B contains 1-2 nitrogen atoms and 0-1 sulfur atoms.
  • B is unsubstituted or substituted by (C 1 -C 3 )alkyl, CF 3 , cyano, or halogen.
  • Z is NH 2 ;
  • R 6 is H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkenyl, (C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl or cyano, and the alkyl, alkenyl and heteroalkyl groups optionally bear additional substituents selected from cyano, carboxamido, (C 1 -C 3 )alkylsulfonyl or (C 1 -C 3 )alkoxy; and R 7 is H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl or cyano
  • Z is NH 2 ;
  • R 6 is H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkenyl, (C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl, (C 3 -C 10 )cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl or cyano, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and heteroalkyl groups optionally bear additional substituents selected from cyano, carboxamido,(C 1 -C 3 )alkylsulfonyl or (C 1 -C 3 )alkoxy; and R 7 is H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl or cyano.
  • R 7 is preferably H, halogen, CF 3 and (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl.
  • R 6 is CH 2 (CH 2 ) m CN, CH 2 (CH 2 ) n SO 2 CH 3 or CH 2 (CH 2 ) n OCH 3 , wherein the subscript n is an integer from 0 to 2 Also particularly preferred are embodiments in which R 6 is
  • Y is O, S or N—CN
  • W′ is N(CH 3 ), N(CF 3 ), N(CH 2 CH 3 ), O or S; the subscripts n and n′ are independently integers from 0 to 3
  • R 7 is H, halogen, CF 3 , CF 3 O, (C 1 -C 4 )alkyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkenyl, (C 2 -C 4 )alkynyl, (C 1 -C 4 )heteroalkyl or cyano
  • R 9 is CN, CONH 2 , CO—NH—(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, CO—N[(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl] 2 , CO—NH—(C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl, CO—N[(C 1 -C 6 )heteroalkyl] 2 , S(O) n′′ —(
  • the synthesis of the target compounds is generally accomplished by reaction of the appropriate aldehyde (or ketone, when R 4 is other than H) ii with the appropriately substituted hydrazine derivative.
  • the aldehyde (or ketone) intermediate ii is not fully isolated and/or characterized, but is simply synthesized from the corresponding ester i (or similar compound with the appropriate functional group) and utilized directly in the final reaction.
  • the final products can be isolated, and purified if necessary, either by filtration, recrystallization, and/or chromatography, as appropriate.
  • the starting esters can be prepared by a variety of methods generally known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Representative methods (Methods A-O) for the synthesis of these ester intermediates are provided in the Examples below.
  • the present invention further provides methods of preparing antiinflammation agents, comprising contacting a precursor compound having the formula: wherein W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH; R 4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 7 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl and (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl; A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen
  • the present invention provides in another aspect, compounds of the formula: wherein W and X are independently selected from N and CH; R 4 is selected from H, (C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, (C 3 -C 6 )cycloalkyl, (C 4 -C 7 )cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C 2 -C 6 )alkenyl and (C 2 -C 6 )alkynyl; A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen
  • the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more of the subject compounds in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • the invention provides the subject compounds combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient such as sterile saline, methylcellulose solutions, detergent solutions or other medium, water, gelatin, oils, etc.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient such as sterile saline, methylcellulose solutions, detergent solutions or other medium, water, gelatin, oils, etc.
  • the compounds or compositions may be administered alone or in combination with any convenient carrier, diluent, etc., and such administration may be provided in single or multiple dosages.
  • Useful carriers include water soluble and water insoluble solids, fatty acids, micelles, inverse micelles, liposomes and semi-solid or liquid media, including aqueous solutions and non-toxic organic solvents. All of the above formulations may be treated with ultrasounds, stirred, mixed, high-shear mixed, heated, ground, milled, aerosolized, pulverized, lyophilized, etc., to form pharmaceutically acceptable compositions.
  • the invention provides the subject compounds in the form of a prodrug, which can be metabolically or chemically converted to the subject compound by the recipient host.
  • a prodrug which can be metabolically or chemically converted to the subject compound by the recipient host.
  • prodrug derivatives are known in the art such as those that rely on hydrolytic cleavage or oxidative activation of the prodrug.
  • compositions may be provided in any convenient form, including tablets, capsules, lozenges, troches, hard candies, powders, sprays, creams, suppositories, etc.
  • the compositions in pharmaceutically acceptable dosage units or in bulk, may be incorporated into a wide variety of containers.
  • dosage units may be included in a variety of containers including capsules, pills, etc.
  • compositions of the present invention are those that combine two or more of the present compounds in one formulation, or one compound from the present invention with a second antiinflammatory, antiproliferative or antidiabetic agent.
  • the present invention provides methods of treating IKK-mediated conditions or diseases by administering to a subject having such a disease or condition, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I above.
  • the “subject” is defined herein to include animals such as mammals, including, but not limited to, primates (e.g., humans), cows, sheep, goats, horses, dogs, cats, rabbits, rats, mice and the like.
  • diseases or conditions including chronic diseases, of humans or other species can be treated with inhibitors of IKK function.
  • diseases or conditions include: (1) inflammatory or allergic diseases such as systemic anaphylaxis or hypersensitivity responses, drug allergies, insect sting allergies; inflammatory bowel diseases, such as Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, ileitis and enteritis; vaginitis; psoriasis and inflammatory dermatoses such as dermatitis, eczema, atopic dermatitis, allergic contact dermatitis, urticaria; vasculitis; spondyloarthropathies; scleroderma; respiratory allergic diseases such as asthma, allergic rhinitis, hypersensitivity lung diseases, and the like, (2) autoimmune diseases, such as arthritis (rheumatoid and psoriatic), osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, systemic lupus
  • the compounds of the present invention may be administered by oral, parenteral (e.g., intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, ICV, intracistemal injection or infusion, subcutaneous injection or implant), inhalation, nasal, vaginal, rectal, sublingual transdermal or topical routes of administration and may be formulated, alone or together, in suitable dosage unit formulations containing conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants and vehicles appropriate for each route of administration.
  • the present invention also contemplates administration of the compounds of the present invention in a depot formulation, in which the active ingredient is released over a defined time period.
  • an appropriate dosage level will generally be about 0.001 to 100 mg per kg patient body weight per day which can be administered in single or multiple doses.
  • the dosage level will be about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg per day; more preferably about 0.05 to about 10 mg/kg per day.
  • a suitable dosage level may be about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg per day, about 0.05 to 10 mg/kg per day, or about 0.1 to 5 mg/kg per day. Within this range the dosage may be 0.005 to 0.05, 0.05 to 0.5 or 0.5 to 5.0 mg/kg per day.
  • compositions are preferably provided in the form of tablets containing 1.0 to 1000 milligrams of the active ingredient, particularly 1.0, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0. 20.0, 25.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100.0, 150.0, 200.0, 250.0, 300.0, 400.0, 500.0, 600.0, 750.0, 800.0, 900.0, and 1000.0 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage to the patient to be treated.
  • the compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.
  • the compounds of the present invention can be combined with other compounds having related utilities to prevent and treat inflammatory and immunoregulatory disorders and diseases, including asthma and allergic diseases, as well as autoimmune pathologies such as rheumatoid arthritis and atherosclerosis, and those pathologies noted above.
  • the present compounds may be used in conjunction with an antiinflammatory or analgesic agent such as an opiate agonist, a lipoxygenase inhibitor, such as an inhibitor of 5-lipoxygenase, a cyclooxygenase inhibitor, such as a cyclooxygenase-2 inhibitor, an interleukin receptor antagonist, such as an interleukin-1 receptor antagonist, an NMDA receptor antagonist, an inhibitor of nitric oxide or an inhibitor of the synthesis of nitric oxide, a non-steroidal antiinflammatory agent, or a cytokine-suppressing antiinflammatory agent, for example with a compound such as acetaminophen, aspirin, codiene, fentanyl, ibuprofen, indomethacin, ketorolac, morphine, naproxen, phenacetin, piroxicam, a steroidal analgesic, sufentanyl, sulindac, tenida
  • the instant compounds may be administered with a pain reliever, a potentiator such as caffeine, an H2-antagonist, simethicone, aluminum or magnesium hydroxide; a decongestant such as phenylephrine, phenylpropanolamine, pseudophedrine, oxymetazoline, ephinephrine, naphazoline, xylometazoline, propylhexedrine, or levo-desoxy-ephedrine; an antitussive such as codiene, hydrocodone, caramiphen, carbetapentane, or dextramethorphan; a diuretic; and a sedating or non-sedating antihistamine.
  • a pain reliever such as caffeine, an H2-antagonist, simethicone, aluminum or magnesium hydroxide
  • a decongestant such as phenylephrine, phenylpropanolamine, pseudophedrine, oxymetazoline, ephinep
  • each of the above agents may be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of the present invention.
  • a pharmaceutical composition containing such other drugs in addition to the compound of the present invention may be preferred.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention include those that also contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of the present invention.
  • Examples of other active ingredients that may be combined with a compound of the present invention, either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical compositions, include, but are not limited to: (a) VLA-4 antagonists, (b) steroids such as beclomethasone, methylprednisolone, betamethasone, prednisone, dexamethasone, and hydrocortisone; (c) immunosuppressants such as methotrexate cyclosporin, tacrolimus, rapamycin and other FK-506 type immunosuppressants; (d) antihistamines (H1-histamine antagonists) such as bromopheniramine, chlorpheniramine, dexchlorpheniramine, triprolidine, clemastine, diphenhydramine, diphenylpyraline, tripelennamine, hydroxyzine, methdilazine, promethazine, trimeprazine, azatadine, cyproheptadine, antazoline, phen
  • the weight ratio of the compound of the present invention to the second active ingredient may be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when a compound of the present invention is combined with an NSAID the weight ratio of the compound of the present invention to the NSAID will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200. Combinations of a compound of the present invention and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used.
  • Reagents and solvents used below can be obtained from commercial sources such as Aldrich Chemical Co. (Milwaukee, Wis., USA).
  • 1 H-NMR spectra were recorded on a Varian Gemini 400 MHz NMR spectrometer. Significant peaks are tabulated in the order: multiplicity (s, singlet; d, doublet; t, triplet; q, quartet; m, multiplet; br s, broad singlet), coupling constant(s) in Hertz (Hz) and number of protons.
  • Electron Ionization (EI) mass spectra were recorded on a Hewlett Packard 5989A mass spectrometer.
  • Mass spectrometry results are reported as the ratio of mass over charge, followed by the relative abundance of each ion (in parentheses). In tables, a single m/e value is reported for the M+H (or, as noted, M ⁇ H) ion containing the most common atomic isotopes. Isotope patterns correspond to the expected formula in all cases.
  • Electrospray ionization (ESI) mass spectrometry analysis was conducted on a Hewlett-Packard 1100 MSD electrospray mass spectrometer using the HP1100 HPLC for sample delivery.
  • the analyte was dissolved in methanol at 0.1 mg/mL and 1 microliter ( ⁇ L) was infused with the delivery solvent into the mass spectrometer, which scanned from 100 to 1500 daltons. All compounds could be analyzed in the positive ESI mode, using 1:1 acetonitrile/water with 1% acetic acid as the delivery solvent. The compounds provided below could also be analyzed in the negative ESI mode, using 2 mM NH 4 OAc in acetonitrile/water as delivery solvent
  • the acid vi (500 mg, 1.99 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of MeOH and conc. H 2 SO 4 (1.0 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 22 h and brought to room temperature. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was dissolved with water and adjusted to basic pH by the addition of solid K 2 CO 3 . The aqueous phase was extracted three times with EtOAc. The organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over MgSO 4 , filtered and concentrated to dryness to give the desired ester iii (300 mg).
  • substituted isatins can be prepared via a Sandmeyer procedure (see, Simon J. Garden, Jose C. Torres, Alexandra A. Ferreira, Rosangela B. Silva, Angelo C. Pinto; Tetrahedron Letters 38, 9, 1501, (1997) and references cited therein); a formanilide method (see, Otto, et al., Tetrahedron Letters 37, 52, 9381, (1996)); a Stolle type procedure (see Soll, et al., J. Org. Chem.
  • the aqueous phase was extracted three times with EtOAc, the organic extracts were combined, dried over MgSO 4 , filtered, and concentrated to dryness to obtain an oil (1.8 g).
  • the crude product was purified by chromatography (silica gel, CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH, 97:3) to give the desired ketoester ix as an oil (680 mg, 23%).
  • the corresponding ester of this acid can be prepared as described in Method A, Step 3, or other standard methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • this acid can be converted directly into the corresponding aldehyde using methods well known in the art.
  • This method is a variation on Method B; above.
  • metal-halogen exchange is used instead of direct metallation of an aniline derivative.
  • the reaction was heated at reflux for 14 h, at which time it was cooled, the volume of solvent reduced to about 15 mL under vacuum and the solution placed on a silica gel column. The column was eluted with 5% MeOH in methylene chloride to give 3.5 g of the alcohol xix.
  • This method is a variation on Method D, although in this case the fused A ring is not aromatic, and an aromatic triflate is used in the coupling reaction.
  • This method also illustrates a variation to Method D, but in this case W ⁇ X ⁇ CH (utilizing a naphthalene framework).
  • This method illustrates the homologation of the A ring at the stage of one of the intermediates.
  • This method exemplifies yet other types of homologation of the A ring at the stage of one of the intermediates.
  • N-Iodosuccinimide (25.0 g, 119.5 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of 6-trifluoromethylisatin (10.3 g, 47.8 mmol) and triflic acid (75 g) at 0° C. under nitrogen. The ice bath was removed and stirring at room temperature was continued for 7 h. The mixture was poured into ice-water and was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was triturated with CHCl 3 to produce a yellow-orange solid. Filtration of the crude solid and purification by recrystallization from CHCl 3 gave 5-iodo-6-trifluoromethylisatin xxxiii (10.4 g) as an orange solid.
  • 1 H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) ⁇ 7.17(s, 1H), 8.08(s, 1H), 11.27(s, 1H); ms 340.0 (M ⁇ H).
  • This method describes additional homologation strategies for the A ring of various intermediates.
  • This method describes additional methodology for elaboration of the A ring of one of the intermediates.
  • This method describes additional methodology for the elaboration of the A ring of one of the intermediates.
  • This method describes the synthesis of compounds in which the B ring is linked to the remainder of the molecule via a nitrogen atom.
  • the following example is a variation of Method M in which the B ring is attached to the central ring via a nitrogen atom.
  • This method describes additional ways of modifying the A ring of one of the intermediates.
  • the starting ester was reduced by the standard procedure described in Example 1.1 to afford a mixture of aldehyde and alcohol.
  • the thiosemicarbazone was prepared from this mixture by using the standard procedure described in Example 1.3.
  • the trityl-protected thiosemicarbazone lxxiv (12 mg, 0.02 mmol) was treated with TFA:DCM (1:1, 2 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 5 h, then concentrated in vacuo.
  • the aldehyde was prepared by LAH reduction of the ester xxiii: 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) ⁇ 10.18 (s, 1H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 4.00 (s, 3H), 3.16-3.19 (m, 2H), 2.98-3.05 (m, 2H), 1.81-1.97 (m, 2H).
  • the semicarbazone was prepared by the standard procedure to provide 1.6: 1 H NMR (MSO-d 6 ) ⁇ 10.45 (s, 1H). 8.09 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H) 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.57 (s, 1H), 7.65 (br s, 1H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 2.77-2.85 (m, 4H), 1.78-1.81 (m, 4H); ESI-MS m/z 299.1 (100, M+H + ).
  • reaction mixture was filtered through Celite, the filtrate was concentrated, and the residue was purified (SiO 2 , CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH, 96:4) to give an oil. This was triturated with hexane/EtOAc and the solid was filtered to give an intermediate aldehyde (60 mg, 26%).
  • the aldehyde lxxiii was formed by LAH reduction of the ester liii according to the general procedure (see Example 1).
  • This example illustrates the preparation of a 2-triazolyl-quinoline semithiocarbazone.
  • the methyl ester (300 mg, 0.95 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of THF and cooled to ⁇ 78° C. A 1.0 M solution of LiAlH 4 (3.0 mL, 3.0 mmol) in THF was added and the reaction was stirred until the ester was consumed (by TLC). The reaction quenched with 10% NH 4 Cl at ⁇ 78° C., brought to room temperature and aqueous extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ ). Organic layer dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and concentrated to dryness to give the desired alcohol (150 mg).
  • the resulting salt was treated with 3M HCl (134 mL) which was heated to induce it to dissolve.
  • the still warm solution was poured into a separatory funnel and extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the remaining aqueous layer was adjusted to pH 10 with K 2 CO 3 .
  • the solution was extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 , dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated to give 6 g of the alcohol.
  • This alcohol (6 g, 46.7 mmol) was suspended in CH 2 Cl 2 (100 mL) and SOCl 2 (6.8 mL, 93.3 mmol) added dropwise. After stirring for 12 h, the solvent was removed to provide a crude HCl salt.
  • This salt (5.98 g) was dissolved in EtOH (100 mL) and treated with NH 2 NH 2 (19.5 mL, 405 mmol) and heated to reflux for 3 h. Half the solvent was removed, the residue extracted with ether and the extracts dried and concentrated to give 4.55 g of a crude oil.
  • This crude hydrazine (2.01 g, 14.06 mmol) was dissolved in THF (100 mL) and triphenylmethylisocyanate (4.0 g, 14.1 mmol) was added slowly. The solution was then stirred overnight and the solvent removed under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH/NH 4 OH) to provide 350 mg of the desired product.
  • a suspension of zinc metal (1.70 g, 26.2 mmol) in THF (2 mL) containing 1,2-dibromoethane (190 mg, 1.0 mmol) was heated to 65° C. for one minute, cooled to room temperature and treated with TMSCl (0.10 mL, 0.80 mmol). After 15 min at room temperature, a warm solution of 4-iodomethyltetrahydropyran (5.65 g, 25.0 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added dropwise. Upon completion of the addition, the reaction mixture was heated to 40° C. for 12 h and then cooled to room temperature.
  • Compound 8 was prepared from 2-hydroxypropylhydrazine (obtained following the method of Gever J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1954, 76, 1283) and aldehyde C (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) following the methods in Example 5. MS (M+1) + : 456.
  • This example provides an assay that is useful in evaluating and selecting a compound that modulates IKK.
  • 96 well polystyrene microtiter plates were coated with Neutravidin (10 ⁇ g/mL in PBS, overnight at 4° C.). The coating solution was removed and in 80 ⁇ L/well a kinase reaction mixture was added (20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgC 2 , 2 mM EGTA, 1 mM NaF, 0.5 mM benzamidine, 1 mM DTT, 0.1% NP-40, 10 ⁇ M ATP, 1 ⁇ M of biotinylated substrate peptide KKERLLDDRHDSGLDSMKDEEYEQGK-bio, sequence derived from I ⁇ B ⁇ ).
  • test compounds were added covering a final concentration range from 1 nM to 30 ⁇ M.
  • Recombinant full-length IKK ⁇ enzyme produced in a baculovirus system in insect cells was added in 10 ⁇ L buffer containing Tris-HCl pH 7.5 20 mM, EGTA 2 mM, benzamidine 0.5 mM, DTT 1 mM, NP-40 0.1%, MgCl 2 10 mM to initiate the kinase reaction.
  • the reaction mixture was incubated at room temperature for 45 min. During this incubation the substrate peptide gets phosphorylated by IKK ⁇ and gets captured onto the well's surface by Neutravidin.
  • the plate was washed 3 ⁇ with 150 ⁇ L distilled water to terminate the reaction and remove components of the reaction mixture.
  • a conventional chemiluminescent ELISA detection technique was initiated by adding 100 ⁇ L/well primary antibody (custom-made monoclonal antibody generated to recognize the phosphorylated epitope in the substrate peptide; used at 1:10,000 dilution) premixed with horseradish peroxidase (HRP) conjugated anti-mouse secondary antibody (commercially available from several sources; used at 1:10,000 dilution) in PBS containing 2% BSA. The solution was incubated at room temperature for 40 min on a shaker, then washed 3 ⁇ with 150 ⁇ L of water.
  • HRP horseradish peroxidase
  • the compounds provided in Examples 1-4 all displayed IC 50 values of less than or equal to about 30 ⁇ M in the above assay.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Transplantation (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)

Abstract

Compounds, compositions and methods that are useful in the treatment of inflammatory, immunoregulatory, metabolic and cell proliferative conditions or diseases are provided herein. In particular, the invention provides compounds which modulate the expression and/or function of proteins involved in inflammation, metabolism and cell proliferation. The subject compounds contain fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic rings.

Description

  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. Ser. No. 60/243,582 filed Oct. 26, 2000 which is incorporated by reference in its entirety
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF) and interleukin-1 (IL-1) are cytokines that have been implicated in a wide range of biological processes, including inflammation. The recruitment of immune cells to sites of injury involves the concerted interactions of a large number of soluble mediators. Several cytokines appear to play key roles in these processes, particularly IL-1 and TNF. Both cytokines are derived from mononuclear cells and macrophages, along with other cell types. Physiologically, they produce many of the same proinflammatory responses, including fever, sleep and anorexia, mobilization and activation of polymorphonuclear leukocytes, induction of cyclooxygenase and lipoxygenase enzymes, increase in adhesion molecule expression, activation of B-cells, T-cells and natural killer cells, and stimulation of production of other cytokines. Other actions include a contribution to the tissue degeneration seen in chronic inflammatory conditions, such as stimulation of fibroblast proliferation, induction of collagenase, etc. They have also been implicated in the process of bone resorption and adipose tissue regulation. Thus, these cytokines play key roles in a large number of pathological conditions, including rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, diabetes, obesity, bone mass loss, cancer, neurological conditions such as ischemic stroke or closed head injuries, etc.
  • Cytokines trigger a variety of changes in gene expression in their target cells by binding and activating their respective cognate receptors. Receptor activation sets in motion certain biochemical events, including the activation of otherwise latent transcription factors. Members of the NF-κB Rel family of transcription factors represent some of the most prominent of these transcription factors, having been implicated in the regulation of genes involved in inflammation, cell proliferation, apoptosis, and several other basic cellular functions (Verma et al. Genes Dev. 9, 2723 (1995); Baichwal & Baeuerle, Curr. Biol. 7, 94 (1997)).
  • The best studied member of this family of transcription factors is NF-κB, which generally exists in cells as a heterodimer of two proteins: p50 (NF-κB1) and p65 (RelA), although homodimers of these individual components are also possible (Baeuerle and Baltimore, Cell, 53, 211 (1988); Baeuerle and Henkel, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 12, 141 (1994)). NF-κB, in its inactive form, resides in the cytoplasm of cells. In response to various types of stimuli, such as proinflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNF and IL-1), ultraviolet irradiation and viral infection (Verma, 1995; Baichwal, 1997; Cao et al. Science, 271, 1128 (1996)) NF-κB migrates to the nucleus. TNF and IL-1 have been shown to be two key proinflammation agents in a wide variety of pathological conditions, including rheumatoid arthritis, septic shock, inflammatory bowel disease, dermal sensitization disorders, neurological trauma such as stroke or closed-head injuries, etc.
  • In its inactive state, the NF-κB heterodimer is held in the cytoplasm by association with inhibitory IkB proteins. Recently, the three-dimensional structure of a NF-κB/IκB ternary complex has been solved (Huxford et al. Cell, 95, 759 (1998); Jacobs et al. Cell, 95, 749 (1998)). When cells are treated with the appropriate stimuli, such as IL-1 or TNF, intracellular signal transduction pathways are activated that lead to the eventual phosphorylation of IkB proteins on two specific residues (serines 32 and 36 in IkBα, serines 19 and 23 in IkB β). Mutation of one or both serine residues renders IkB resistant to cytokine-induced phosphorylation. This signal-induced phosphorylation targets IkB for ubiquitination and proteosome-mediated degradation, allowing nuclear translocation of NF-κB (Thanos and Maniatis, Cell, 80, 529 (1995)). The only regulated step in the IkB degradation pathway is the phosphorylation of IkB by IkB kinases (IKK) (Yaron et al. EMBO J 16, 6486 (1997)).
  • Several intermediate steps in the TNF- and IL-1-activated signaling pathways that result in IkB phosphorylation have been elucidated in recent years. Both pathways appear to merge at the level of the protein kinase NIK (NF-κB-inducing kinase) (Malinin et al. Nature, 385, 540 (1997); Song et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 94, 9792 (1997)). Similarly, the protein kinases MEKK1 and MLK3 have been implicated in the induction of IKK activity (Lee et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 95, 9319 (1998); Hehner et al. Mol. Cell. Biol. 20, 2556 (2000)). While the specific details remain somewhat unclear regarding how these or other intermediate proteins may interact with and/or stimulate IKK activity in cells, significant progress has been made in elucidating the enzymes responsible for IkB phosphorylation. Two IKK enzymes, generally referred to as IKKα and IKK β (Woronicz et al. Science, 278, 866 (1997); Zandi et al. Cell, 91, 243 (1997)) or IKK-1 and IKK-2 (Mercurio et al. Science, 278, 860 (1997)) have been discovered. Both forms of IKK can exist as homodimers and as IKKα/IKK β heterodimers. Another recently discovered component of the IkB kinase complex is a regulatory protein, known as IKK-gamma or NEMO (NF-κB-Essential Modulator) (Rothwarf et al. Nature, 395, 297 (1998)). NEMO does not contain a catalytic domain, and thus it appears to have no direct kinase activity and it probably serves a regulatory function. Existing data suggest that the predominant form of IKK in cells is an IKKα/IKK β heterodimer associated with either a dimer or a trimer of NEMO (Rothwarf et al. Nature 395, 297 (1998)).
  • Biochemical and molecular biology experiments have clearly identified IKKα and IKK β as the most likely mediators of TNF- and IL-1-induced IkB phosphorylation and degradation, which results in NF-κB activation and upregulation of families of genes involved in inflammatory processes (Woronicz et al. Science (1997); Karin, Oncogene 18, 6867 (1999); Karin, J. Biol. Chem. 274, 27339 (1999)). IKKα and IKKβ have very similar primary structures, displaying more than 50% overall sequence identity. In the kinase domain, their sequences are 65% identical.
  • Based on our present understanding of the critical role played by TNF and IL-1 in the wide array of pathological conditions described above, and the involvement of IKKα and IKKβ in the signal transduction of both cytokines, the discovery of compounds that potently and selectively inhibit either of these kinases would result in a major advancement in the therapy of those conditions. In this application we describe a novel type of compounds which displays such desirable activity.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • In one aspect, the present invention provides compounds useful in the treatment of inflammatory, metabolic or malignant conditions, having the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00001
  • In formula I, the letters W and X independently represent N or CH; Y represents O, S or N(R), wherein R is H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl or (C2-C10)alkynyl; and Z represents H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl or NR2R3.
  • The symbols R1, R2 and R3 are independently H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C4-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, or perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl. Additionally, when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a heterocyclic 5- to 7-membered ring. The symbol R4 represents H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl or (C2-C6)alkynyl.
  • In formula I, the letter A represents a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the A ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are five- or six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated. The letter B represents a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)Cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
  • Unless otherwise indicated, the compounds provided in the above formula are meant to include pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof.
  • In another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more compounds of formula I in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods for the treatment of an inflammatory, metabolic or malignant condition, comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment a compound of formula I.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • Abbreviations and Definitions
  • The abbreviations used herein are conventional, unless otherwise defined.
  • Unless otherwise stated, the following terms used in the specification and claims have the meanings given below:
  • “Acyl” means the group —C(O)R′, where R′ is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aryl-alkyl, and variations of these groups in which one or more carbon atoms have been rep laced with heteroatoms.
  • “Alkyl” means a linear saturated monovalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched saturated monovalent hydrocarbon radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix. For example, (C1-C6)alkyl is meant to include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, 2-propyl, tert-butyl, pentyl and the like. For each of the definitions herein (e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, aralkyloxy), when a prefix is not included to indicate the number of main chain carbon atoms in an alkyl portion, the radical or portion thereof will have six or fewer main chain carbon atoms.
  • “terfluoroalkyl” refers to an alkyl group having the indicated number of carbon atoms, in which some of the attached hydrogen atoms have been replaced with fluorine atoms, in a number ranging from 1 to the maximal number of hydrogen atoms on the alkyl group.
  • “Alkylene” means a linear saturated divalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched saturated divalent hydrocarbon radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix. For example, (C1-C6)alkylene is meant to include methylene, ethylene, propylene, 2-methylpropylene, pentylene, and the like.
  • “Alkenyl” means a linear monovalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched monovalent hydrocarbon radical having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix and containing at least one double bond. For example, (C2-C6)alkenyl is meant to include, ethenyl, propenyl, and the like.
  • “Alkynyl” means a linear monovalent hydrocarbon radical or a branched monovalent hydrocarbon radical containing at least one triple bond and having the number of carbon atoms indicated in the prefix. For example, (C2-C6)alkynyl is meant to include ethynyl propynyl and the like.
  • “Alkoxy”, “aryloxy”, “aralkyloxy”, or “heteroaralkyloxy” means a radical —OR where R is an alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl respectively, as defined herein, e.g., methoxy, phenoxy, benzyloxy, pyridin-2-ylmethyloxy, and the like.
  • “Alkoxycarbonylalkyl” means a radical —RaC(O)Rb where Ra is an alkylene group as defined above and Rb is an alkoxy group as defined above, e.g., methoxycarbonylethyl, ethoxycarbonylbutyl, and the like.
  • “Aryl” means a monovalent monocyclic or bicyclic aromatic hydrocarbon radical of 6 to 10 ring atoms which is substituted independently with one to four substituents, preferably one, two, or three substituents selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, heteroalkyl, COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), —(CR′R″)n—COOR (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl) or —(CR′R″)n—CONRaRb (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and Ra and Rb are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl). More specifically the term aryl includes, but is not limited to, phenyl biphenyl, 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl, and the derivatives thereof.
  • “Aralkyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an alkylene group (having six or fewer main chain carbon atoms) and Rb is an aryl group as defined herein, e.g., benzyl, phenylethyl 3-(3-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpentyl and the like.
  • “Aralkenyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an alkenylene group and Rb is an aryl group as defined herein, e.g., 3-phenyl-2-propenyl, and the like.
  • “Arylheteroalkyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an heteroalkylene group and Rb is an aryl group as defined herein, e.g., 2-hydroxy-2-phenyl-ethyl, 2-hydroxy-1-hydroxymethyl-2-phenyl-ethyl, and the like.
  • “Cycloalkyl” means a saturated monovalent cyclic hydrocarbon radical of three to seven ring carbons. The cycloalkyl may be optionally substituted independently with one, two, or three substituents selected from alkyl, optionally substituted phenyl, or —C(O)R (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, hydroxy, alkoxy, or optionally substituted phenyl). More specifically, the term cycloalkyl includes, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, phenylcyclohexyl, 4-carboxycyclohexyl, 2-carboxamidocyclohexyl, 2-dimethylaminocarbonyl-cyclohexyl, and the like.
  • “Cycloalkyl-alkyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an alkylene group and Rb is a cycloalkyl group as defined herein, e.g., cyclopropylmethyl, cyclohexylpropyl, 3-cyclohexyl-2-methylpropyl, and the like. The prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms (e.g., C4-C10) refers to the total number of carbon atoms from both the cycloalkyl portion and the alkyl portion.
  • “Haloalkyl” means alkyl substituted with one or more same or different halo atoms, e.g., —CH2Cl, —CF3, —CH2CF3, —CH2CCl3, and the like, and further includes those alkyl groups such as perfluoroalkyl in which all hydrogen atoms are replaced by fluorine atoms. The prefix “halo” and the term “halogen” when used to describe a substituent, refer to —F, —Cl, —Br and —I.
  • “Heteroalkyl” means an alkyl radical as defined herein with one, two or three substituents independently selected from cyano, —ORa, —NRbRc, and —S(O)nRd (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), with the understanding that the point of attachment of the heteroalkyl radical is through a carbon atom of the heteroalkyl radical. Ra is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, carboxamido, or mono- or di-alkylcarbamoyl. Rb is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl or aralkyl. Rc is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, carboxamido, mono- or di-alkylcarbamoyl or alkylsulfonyl. Rd is hydrogen (provided that n is 0), alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, amino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, or hydroxyalkyl. Representative examples include, for example, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 2-methoxyethyl, benzyloxymethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, and 2-methylsulfonyl-ethyl. For each of the above, Ra, Rb,Rc, and Rd can be further substituted by NH2, fluorine, alkylamino, di-alkylamino, OH or alkoxy. Additionally, the prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms (e.g., C1-C10) refers to the total number of carbon atoms in the portion of the heteroalkyl group exclusive of the cyano, —ORa, —NRbRc, or —S(O)nRd portions.
  • “Heteroaryl” means a monovalent monocyclic or bicyclic radical of 5 to 12 ring atoms having at least one aromatic ring containing one, two, or three ring heteroatoms selected from N, O, or S, the remaining ring atoms being C, with the understanding that the attachment point of the heteroaryl radical will be on an aromatic ring. The heteroaryl ring is optionally substituted independently with one to four substituents, preferably one or two substituents, selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, heteroalkyl, —COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl, —(CR′R″)n—COOR (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), or —(CR′R″)n-CONRaRb (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and Ra and Rb are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl). More specifically the term heteroaryl includes, but is not limited to, pyridyl, furanyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, triazolyl, imidazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, benzofuranyl, tetrahydrobenzofuranyl, isobenzofuranyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoisothiazolyl, benzotriazolyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, isoquinolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzisoxazolyl or benzothienyl, and the derivatives thereof.
  • “Heteroaralkyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an alkylene group and Rb is a heteroaryl group as defined herein, e.g., pyridin-3-ylmethyl, 3-(benzofuran-2-yl)propyl, and the like.
  • “Heteroaralkenyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an alkenylene group and Rb is a heteroaryl group as defined herein, e.g., 3-(pyridin-3-yl)propen-2-yl, and the like.
  • “Heterocyclyl” or “cycloheteroalkyl” means a saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic cyclic radical of 3 to 8 ring atoms in which one or two ring atoms are heteroatoms selected from O, NR (where R is independently hydrogen or alkyl) or S(O)n (where n is an integer from 0 to 2), the remaining ring atoms being C, where one or two C atoms may optionally be replaced by a carbonyl group. The heterocyclyl ring may be optionally substituted independently with one, two, or three substituents selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, —COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), —(CR′R″)n—COOR (n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), or —(CR′R″)n—CONRaRb (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, Ra and Rb are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl). More specifically the term heterocyclyl includes, but is not limited to, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidino, N-methylpiperidin-3-yl, piperazino, N-methylpyrrolidin-3-yl, 3-pyrrolidino, 2-pyrrolidon-1-yl, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-1-oxide, thiomorpholino-1,1-dioxide, pyrrolidinyl, and the derivatives thereof. The prefix indicating the number of carbon atoms (e.g., C3-C10) refers to the total number of carbon atoms in the portion of the cycloheteroalkyl or heterocyclyl group exclusive of the number of heteroatoms.
  • “Heterocyclylalkyl” or “Cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl” means a radical —RaRb where Ra is an alkylene group and Rb is a heterocyclyl group as defined herein, e.g., tetrahydropyran-2-ylmethyl, 4-methylpiperazin-1-ylethyl, 3-piperidinylmethyl, and the like.
  • “Heteroalkylene” means a linear saturated divalent hydrocarbon radical of one to six carbons or a branched saturated hydrocarbon radical of three to six carbon atoms with one, two or three substituents independently selected from —ORa, —NRbRc, and —S(O)nRd (where n is an integer from 0 to 2) where, Ra, Rb, Rc, and Rd are as defined herein for a heteroalkyl radical. Examples include, 2-hydroxyethan-1,2-diyl, 2-hydroxypropan-1,3-diyl and the like.
  • “Heterosubstituted cycloalkyl” means a cycloalkyl group wherein one, two, or three hydrogen atoms are replaced by substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, or —SOnR (where n is an integer from 0 to 2 and when n is 0, R is hydrogen or alkyl and when n is 1 or 2, R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, or hydroxyalkyl). Examples include 4-hydroxycyclohexyl, 2-aminocyclohexyl etc.
  • “Heteroalkyl substituted cycloalkyl” means a cycloalkyl group wherein one, two, or three hydrogen atoms are replaced independently by heteroalkyl groups, with the understanding that the heteroalkyl group is attached to the cycloalkyl group via a carbon-carbon bond. Examples include 1-hydroxymethyl-cyclopent-1-yl, 2-hydroxymethyl-cyclohex-2-yl and the like.
  • “Heteroalkyl substituted heterocycly” means a heterocyclyl group wherein one, two, or three hydrogen atoms are replaced independently by heteroalkyl groups, with the understanding that the heteroalkyl group is attached to the heterocyclyl group via a carbon-carbon bond. Examples include 4-hydroxymethyl-piperidin-1-yl, and the like.
  • “Hydroxyalkyl” means an alkyl radical as defined herein, substituted with one or more, preferably one, two or three hydroxy groups, provided that the same carbon atom does not carry more than one hydroxy group. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl, 3-hydroxypropyl, 1-hydroxymethyl-2-methylpropyl, 2-hydroxybutyl, 3-hydroxybutyl, 4-hydroxybutyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl, 1-hydroxymethyl-2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxybutyl, 3,4dihydroxybutyl and 2-hydroxymethyl-3-hydroxypropyl, preferably 2-hydroxyethyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl and 1-hydroxymethyl-2-hydroxyethyl. Accordingly, as used herein, the term “hydroxyalkyl” is used to define a subset of heteroalkyl groups.
  • “Optionally substituted phenyl” means a phenyl ring which is optionally substituted independently with one to four substituents, preferably one or two substituents selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkyl-alkyl, halo, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, mono-alkylamino, di-alkylamino, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy, heteroalkyl, —COR (where R is hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl, —(CR′R″)n—COOR (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl), or —CR′R″)n—CONRaRb (where n is an integer from 0 to 5, R′ and R″ are independently hydrogen or alkyl, and Ra and Rb are, independently of each other, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl or phenylalkyl).
  • The terms “modulate”, “modulation” and the like refer to the ability of a compound to increase or decrease the function and/or expression of IKK, where IKK function may include kinase activity and/or protein-binding. Modulation may occur in vitro or in vivo. Modulation, as described herein, includes the inhibition or activation of IKK function and/or the downregulation or upregulation of IKK expression, either directly or indirectly. A modulator preferably activates IKK function and/or upregulates IKK expression. More preferably, a modulator activates or inhibits IKK function and/or upregulates or downregulates IKK expression. Most preferably, a modulator inhibits IKK function and/or downregulates IKK expression. The ability of a compound to inhibit IKK function can be demonstrated in an enzymatic assay or a cell-based assay (e.g., inhibition of IL-1-stimulated NF-κB activation).
  • “Leaving group” has the meaning conventionally associated with it in synthetic organic chemistry i.e., an atom or group capable of being displaced by a nucleophile and includes halo (such as chloro, bromo, iodo), alkanesulfonyloxy, arenesulfonyloxy, alkylcarbonyloxy (e.g., acetoxy), arylcarbonyloxy, mesyloxy, tosyloxy, trifluoromethanesulfonyloxy, aryloxy (e.g., 2,4-dinitrophenoxy), methoxy, N,O- dimethylhydroxylamino, and the like.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient” means a carrier or excipient that is useful in preparing a pharmaceutical composition that is generally safe, non-toxic and neither biologically nor otherwise undesirable, and includes a carrier or excipient that is acceptable for veterinary use as well as human pharmaceutical use. A “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient” as used in the specification and claims includes both one and more than one such carrier or excipient.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound means a salt that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound. Such salts include:
  • (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-napthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 3-phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynapthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid, and the like; or
  • (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base such as ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, trimethylamine, N-methylglucamine, and the like.
  • “Prodrugs” means any compound which releases an active parent drug according to formula I in vivo when such prodrug is administered to a mammalian subject. Prodrugs of a compound of formula I are prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compound of formula I in such a way that the modifications may be cleaved in vivo to release the parent compound. Prodrugs include compounds of formula I wherein a hydroxy, amino, or sulfhydryl group in a compound of formula I is bonded to any group that may be cleaved in vivo to regenerate the free hydroxyl, amino, or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to esters (e.g., acetate, formate, and benzoate derivatives), carbamates (e.g., N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl) of hydroxy functional groups in compounds of formula I, and the like.
  • “Protecting group” refers to a grouping of atoms that when attached to a reactive group in a molecule masks, reduces or prevents that reactivity. Examples of protecting groups can be found in T. W. Greene and P. G. Futs, Protective Groups in Organic Chemistry, (Wiley, 2nd ed. 1991) and Harrison and Harrison et al., Compendium of Synthetic Organic Methods, Vols. 1-8 (John Wiley and Sons. 1971-1996). Representative amino protecting groups include formyl, acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, benzyl, benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), tert-butoxycarbonyl (Boc), trimethyl silyl (TMS), 2-trimethylsilyl-ethanesulfonyl (SES), trityl and substituted trityl groups, alkyloxycarbonyl, 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (FMOC), nitro-veratryloxycarbonyl (NVOC) and the like. Representative hydroxy protecting groups include those where the hydroxy group is either acylated or alkylated such as benzyl and trityl ethers as well as alkyl ethers, tetrahydropyranyl ethers, trialkylsilyl ethers and allyl ethers.
  • “Treating” or “treatment” of a disease includes:
      • (1) preventing the disease, i.e., causing the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a mammal that may be exposed to or predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display symptoms of the disease,
      • (2) inhibiting the disease, i.e., arresting or reducing the development of the disease or its clinical symptoms, or
      • (3) relieving the disease, i.e., causing regression of the disease or its clinical symptoms.
  • As used herein, the term “IKK-mediated condition or disease” and related terms and phrases refer to a condition or disorder characterized by inappropriate, e.g., less than or greater than normal, IKK activity. Inappropriate IKK functional activity might arise as the result of IKK expression in cells which normally do not express IKK, increased IKK expression (leading to, e.g., inflammatory and immunoregulatory disorders and diseases) or decreased IKK expression. An IKK-mediated condition or disease may be completely or partially mediated by inappropriate IKK functional activity. However, an IKK-mediated condition or disease is one in which modulation of IKK results in some effect on the underlying condition or disorder (e.g., an IKK inhibitor results in some improvement in patient well-being in at least some patients).
  • The term “therapeutically effective amount” means the amount of the subject compound that will elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, animal or human that is being sought by the researcher, veterinarian, medical doctor or other clinician. “A therapeutically effective amount” includes the amount of a compound that, when administered to a mammal for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease. The “therapeutically effective amount” will vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity and the age, weight, etc., of the mammal to be treated.
  • “Optional” or “optionally” in the above definitions means that the subsequently described event or circumstance may but need not occur, and that the description includes instances where the event or circumstance occurs and instances in which it does not. For example, “heterocyclo group optionally mono- or di-substituted with an alkyl group” means that the alkyl may but need not be present, and the description includes situations where the heterocyclo group is mono- or disubstituted with an alkyl group and situations where the heterocyclo group is not substituted with the alkyl group.
  • Compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “isomers”. Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers”. Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed “diastereomers” and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed “enantiomers”. When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible. An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (−)-isomers respectively). A chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a “racemic mixture”.
  • The compounds of this invention may exist in stereoisomeric form if they possess one or more asymmetric centers or a double bond with asymmetric substitution and, therefore, can be produced as individual stereoisomers or as mixtures. Unless otherwise indicated, the description is intended to include individual stereoisomers as well as mixtures. The methods for the determination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers are well-known in the art (see discussion in Chapter 4 of “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 4th edition J. March, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1992).
  • The compounds of the present invention can also be produced in radiolabeled form and are useful in assays for evaluating the binding capabilities of compounds that interact with IKKα and with IKKβ.
    • Embodiments of the Invention
  • Compounds
  • In one aspect, the present invention provides compounds useful in the treatment of inflammatory, metabolic or malignant conditions, having the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00002
  • In formula I, the letters W and X independently represent N or CH; Y represents O, S or N(R), wherein R is H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl or (C2-C10)alkynyl; and Z represents H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl or NR2R3.
  • The symbols R1, R2 and R3 are independently H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C4-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1 C4)heteroalkyl or perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl. Additionally, when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl ring. The symbol R4 represents H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl or (C2-C6)alkynyl.
  • In formula I, the letter A represents a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the A ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are five- or six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated.
  • In preferred embodiments, the letter A represents a fused ring selected from:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00003
    wherein R5, R6, R7 and R8 are independently selected from H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, cyano, nitro, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)aklyl]2, SO2NH2, SO2NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, SO2N—[(C1-C6)alkyl]2 and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy; or two adjacent R groups selected from R5, R6, R7 and R8 can be linked together to form a new 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring. Additionally, any of the R5, R6, R7 and R8 groups can be optionally substituted by 1 to 3 of the following: CN, (C1-C6)alkyl-SO2, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl-SO2, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, SO2NH2, SO2NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, or SO2N—[(C1-C6)alkyl]2.
  • The letter B represents a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
  • Preferably, B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule or a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule. More preferably, B is selected from substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl. Still more preferably, B is selected from 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
  • In one group of embodiments, W is N and X is CH. Within this group of embodiments, Y is preferably O or S. More preferably, R4 is H or CH3. Still more preferably, A is selected from:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00004
    wherein the symbols R5, R6 and R7 have the meanings provided above, and R8 is H. Also preferred in this group of embodiments are those in which B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule. More preferably, B is substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl. Still more preferably, B is selected from 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
  • In another group of embodiments, W is N and X is CH. Within this group of embodiments, Y is preferably O or S. More preferably, Z is NR2R3.
  • In another group of embodiments, W is N and X is N. In still another group of embodiments, W is CH and X is N. In yet another group of embodiments, W and X are both CH.
  • In yet another group of preferred embodiments, Y is S; Z is NH2; and R1 is (C1-C6)alkyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl or (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl. In this group of embodiments, preferred groups for each of A and B are the same as have been described above.
  • In yet another group of preferred embodiments, Y is S; Z is NH2; and R1 is CH3. In this group of embodiments, preferred groups for each of A and B are the same as have been described above.
  • In another group of preferred embodiments, W is N; X is CH; Y is O or S; Z is H, CH3, NH2 or NHCH3; R1 is H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, or perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; R4 is H; A represents
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00005
    wherein R6 and R7 are independently selected from H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl and cyano; B represents a five-membered aromatic ring system containing at least one nitrogen atom. Preferably, B contains 1-2 nitrogen atoms and 0-1 sulfur atoms. Most preferably, B is unsubstituted or substituted by (C1-C3)alkyl, CF3, cyano, or halogen. Most preferred in this group of embodiments are compounds in which Z is NH2; R6 is H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl or cyano, and the alkyl, alkenyl and heteroalkyl groups optionally bear additional substituents selected from cyano, carboxamido, (C1-C3)alkylsulfonyl or (C1-C3)alkoxy; and R7 is H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl or cyano.
  • In another group of preferred embodiments, Z is NH2; R6 is H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl or cyano, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and heteroalkyl groups optionally bear additional substituents selected from cyano, carboxamido,(C1-C3)alkylsulfonyl or (C1-C3)alkoxy; and R7 is H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl or cyano. Within this group of embodiments, R7 is preferably H, halogen, CF3 and (C1-C4)alkyl. In particularly preferred embodiments, R6 is CH2(CH2)mCN, CH2(CH2)nSO2CH3 or CH2(CH2)nOCH3, wherein the subscript n is an integer from 0 to 2 Also particularly preferred are embodiments in which R6 is
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00006
  • Yet another group of preferred embodiments is represented by the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00007
    wherein Y is O, S or N—CN; W′ is N(CH3), N(CF3), N(CH2CH3), O or S; the subscripts n and n′ are independently integers from 0 to 3; R7is H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl or cyano; R9 is CN, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)heteroalkyl]2, S(O)n″—(C1-C6)alkyl, S(O)n″(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, (C1-C6)alkoxy or (C3-C6)cycloheteroalkyl, wherein each n″ is independently an integer of 0 to 2; R10 is NH2, NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, NH—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, N[(C1-C6)heteroalkyl]2, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, S(O)n″—(C1-C6)alkyl, S(O)n″—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, O—(C1-C6)alkyl, O—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl or (C3-C8)cycloheteroalkyl; and R11 is H, CF3, NH2, NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, halogen or (C1-C3)alkyl. Most preferably, Y is O or S; W′ is N—CH3; n is 2; n′ is 1 to 3; R9 is cyano, CONH2, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C3-C6)cycloheteroalkyl or SO2-(C1-C6)alkyl; R10 is NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, NH—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, N[(C1-C6)heteroalkyl]2, O—(C1-C6)alkyl, O—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy or (C3-C8)cycloheteroalkyl; and R11 is H.
  • Exemplary structures within this preferred group of embodiments are:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00008
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00009
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00010
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00011
    Preparation of Compounds of Formula I
    General Scheme for Synthesis
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00012
  • The synthesis of the target compounds is generally accomplished by reaction of the appropriate aldehyde (or ketone, when R4 is other than H) ii with the appropriately substituted hydrazine derivative. In some cases, the aldehyde (or ketone) intermediate ii is not fully isolated and/or characterized, but is simply synthesized from the corresponding ester i (or similar compound with the appropriate functional group) and utilized directly in the final reaction. The final products can be isolated, and purified if necessary, either by filtration, recrystallization, and/or chromatography, as appropriate.
  • The starting esters can be prepared by a variety of methods generally known to those skilled in the art of organic synthesis. Representative methods (Methods A-O) for the synthesis of these ester intermediates are provided in the Examples below.
  • In view of these preparative methods, the present invention further provides methods of preparing antiinflammation agents, comprising contacting a precursor compound having the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00013
    wherein W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH; R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl; A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy; with a compound having the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00014
    wherein Y is O, S or N(R), wherein R is H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl; Z is H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl or NR2R3; R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C2-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; under conditions sufficient to produce compounds having the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00015
    wherein each of A, B, R1, R4, W, X, Y and Z have the meanings provided above.
  • Exemplary conditions are provided in the examples below, with the understanding that the skilled practitioner can adjust solvents, temperature, time of reaction, workup conditions and the like to produce the desired compounds.
  • In view of the methods provided herein, one of skill will also appreciate that certain compounds are particularly useful in the preparation of the subject antiinflammation agents. Accordingly, the present invention provides in another aspect, compounds of the formula:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00016
    wherein W and X are independently selected from N and CH; R4 is selected from H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl; A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, the ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein the mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
  • Compositions
  • In addition to the compounds provided above, the present invention further provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more of the subject compounds in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • In one embodiment, the invention provides the subject compounds combined with a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient such as sterile saline, methylcellulose solutions, detergent solutions or other medium, water, gelatin, oils, etc. The compounds or compositions may be administered alone or in combination with any convenient carrier, diluent, etc., and such administration may be provided in single or multiple dosages. Useful carriers include water soluble and water insoluble solids, fatty acids, micelles, inverse micelles, liposomes and semi-solid or liquid media, including aqueous solutions and non-toxic organic solvents. All of the above formulations may be treated with ultrasounds, stirred, mixed, high-shear mixed, heated, ground, milled, aerosolized, pulverized, lyophilized, etc., to form pharmaceutically acceptable compositions.
  • In another embodiment, the invention provides the subject compounds in the form of a prodrug, which can be metabolically or chemically converted to the subject compound by the recipient host. A wide variety of prodrug derivatives are known in the art such as those that rely on hydrolytic cleavage or oxidative activation of the prodrug.
  • The compositions may be provided in any convenient form, including tablets, capsules, lozenges, troches, hard candies, powders, sprays, creams, suppositories, etc. As such, the compositions, in pharmaceutically acceptable dosage units or in bulk, may be incorporated into a wide variety of containers. For example, dosage units may be included in a variety of containers including capsules, pills, etc.
  • Still other compositions of the present invention are those that combine two or more of the present compounds in one formulation, or one compound from the present invention with a second antiinflammatory, antiproliferative or antidiabetic agent.
  • Methods of Use
  • In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods of treating IKK-mediated conditions or diseases by administering to a subject having such a disease or condition, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula I above. The “subject” is defined herein to include animals such as mammals, including, but not limited to, primates (e.g., humans), cows, sheep, goats, horses, dogs, cats, rabbits, rats, mice and the like.
  • Diseases and conditions associated with inflammation, infection and cancer can be treated with the present compounds and compositions. In one group of embodiments, diseases or conditions, including chronic diseases, of humans or other species can be treated with inhibitors of IKK function. These diseases or conditions include: (1) inflammatory or allergic diseases such as systemic anaphylaxis or hypersensitivity responses, drug allergies, insect sting allergies; inflammatory bowel diseases, such as Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, ileitis and enteritis; vaginitis; psoriasis and inflammatory dermatoses such as dermatitis, eczema, atopic dermatitis, allergic contact dermatitis, urticaria; vasculitis; spondyloarthropathies; scleroderma; respiratory allergic diseases such as asthma, allergic rhinitis, hypersensitivity lung diseases, and the like, (2) autoimmune diseases, such as arthritis (rheumatoid and psoriatic), osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, systemic lupus erythematosus, diabetes mellitus, glomerulonephritis, and the like, (3) graft rejection (including allograft rejection and graft-v-host disease), and (4) other diseases in which undesired inflammatory responses are to be inhibited (e.g., atherosclerosis, myositis, neurological conditions such as stroke and closed-head injuries, neurodegenerative diseases, Alzheimer's disease, encephalitis, meningitis, osteoporosis, gout, hepatitis, nephritis, sepsis, sarcoidosis, conjunctivitis, otitis, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, sinusitis and Behcet's syndrome); (5) in another group of embodiments, diseases or conditions are treated with inhibitors of IKK function that will promote cell death; examples of these diseases include, but are not limited to, neoplastic diseases such as solid tumors, skin cancer, melanoma, lymphoma, and diseases in which angiogenesis and neovascularization play a role; (6) other metabolic disorders that are sensitive to inhibition of TNF or IL-1 signaling, such as obesity for example.
  • Depending on the disease to be treated and the subject's condition, the compounds of the present invention may be administered by oral, parenteral (e.g., intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intravenous, ICV, intracistemal injection or infusion, subcutaneous injection or implant), inhalation, nasal, vaginal, rectal, sublingual transdermal or topical routes of administration and may be formulated, alone or together, in suitable dosage unit formulations containing conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants and vehicles appropriate for each route of administration. The present invention also contemplates administration of the compounds of the present invention in a depot formulation, in which the active ingredient is released over a defined time period.
  • In the treatment or prevention of conditions which require chemoline receptor modulation an appropriate dosage level will generally be about 0.001 to 100 mg per kg patient body weight per day which can be administered in single or multiple doses. Preferably, the dosage level will be about 0.01 to about 25 mg/kg per day; more preferably about 0.05 to about 10 mg/kg per day. A suitable dosage level may be about 0.01 to 25 mg/kg per day, about 0.05 to 10 mg/kg per day, or about 0.1 to 5 mg/kg per day. Within this range the dosage may be 0.005 to 0.05, 0.05 to 0.5 or 0.5 to 5.0 mg/kg per day. For oral administration, the compositions are preferably provided in the form of tablets containing 1.0 to 1000 milligrams of the active ingredient, particularly 1.0, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0. 20.0, 25.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100.0, 150.0, 200.0, 250.0, 300.0, 400.0, 500.0, 600.0, 750.0, 800.0, 900.0, and 1000.0 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage to the patient to be treated. The compounds may be administered on a regimen of 1 to 4 times per day, preferably once or twice per day.
  • It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and frequency of dosage for any particular patient may be varied and will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the metabolic stability and length of action of that compound, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, mode and time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, the severity of the particular condition, and the host undergoing therapy.
  • The compounds of the present invention can be combined with other compounds having related utilities to prevent and treat inflammatory and immunoregulatory disorders and diseases, including asthma and allergic diseases, as well as autoimmune pathologies such as rheumatoid arthritis and atherosclerosis, and those pathologies noted above.
  • For example, in the treatment or prevention of inflammation, the present compounds may be used in conjunction with an antiinflammatory or analgesic agent such as an opiate agonist, a lipoxygenase inhibitor, such as an inhibitor of 5-lipoxygenase, a cyclooxygenase inhibitor, such as a cyclooxygenase-2 inhibitor, an interleukin receptor antagonist, such as an interleukin-1 receptor antagonist, an NMDA receptor antagonist, an inhibitor of nitric oxide or an inhibitor of the synthesis of nitric oxide, a non-steroidal antiinflammatory agent, or a cytokine-suppressing antiinflammatory agent, for example with a compound such as acetaminophen, aspirin, codiene, fentanyl, ibuprofen, indomethacin, ketorolac, morphine, naproxen, phenacetin, piroxicam, a steroidal analgesic, sufentanyl, sulindac, tenidap, and the like. Similarly, the instant compounds may be administered with a pain reliever, a potentiator such as caffeine, an H2-antagonist, simethicone, aluminum or magnesium hydroxide; a decongestant such as phenylephrine, phenylpropanolamine, pseudophedrine, oxymetazoline, ephinephrine, naphazoline, xylometazoline, propylhexedrine, or levo-desoxy-ephedrine; an antitussive such as codiene, hydrocodone, caramiphen, carbetapentane, or dextramethorphan; a diuretic; and a sedating or non-sedating antihistamine. Each of the above agents may be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of the present invention. When a compound of the present invention is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, in some cases a pharmaceutical composition containing such other drugs in addition to the compound of the present invention may be preferred. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention include those that also contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of the present invention. Examples of other active ingredients that may be combined with a compound of the present invention, either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical compositions, include, but are not limited to: (a) VLA-4 antagonists, (b) steroids such as beclomethasone, methylprednisolone, betamethasone, prednisone, dexamethasone, and hydrocortisone; (c) immunosuppressants such as methotrexate cyclosporin, tacrolimus, rapamycin and other FK-506 type immunosuppressants; (d) antihistamines (H1-histamine antagonists) such as bromopheniramine, chlorpheniramine, dexchlorpheniramine, triprolidine, clemastine, diphenhydramine, diphenylpyraline, tripelennamine, hydroxyzine, methdilazine, promethazine, trimeprazine, azatadine, cyproheptadine, antazoline, pheniramine pyrilamine, astemizole, terfenadine, loratadine, cetirizine, fexofenadine, descarboethoxyloratadine, and the like; (e) non-steroidal anti-asthmatics such as beta-adrenergic agonists (terbutaline, metaproterenol, fenoterol, isoetharine, albuterol, bitolterol, and pirbuterol), theophylline, cromolyn sodium, atropine, ipratropium bromide, leukotriene antagonists (zafirlukast, montelukast, pranlukast, iralukast, pobilukast, SKB-106,203), leukotriene biosynthesis inhibitors (zileuton, BAY-1005); (f) non-steroidal antiinflammatory agents (NSAIDs) such as propionic acid derivatives (alminoprofen, benoxaprofen, bucloxic acid, carprofen, fenbufen, fenoprofen, fluprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, indoprofen, ketoprofen, miroprofen, naproxen, oxaprozin, pirprofen, pranoprofen, suprofen, tiaprofenic acid, and tioxaprofen), acetic acid derivatives (indomethacin, acemetacin, alclofenac, clidanac, diclofenac, fenclofenac, fenclozic acid, fentiazac, furofenac, ibufenac, isoxepac, oxpinac, sulindac, tiopinac, tolmetin, zidometacin, and zomepirac), fenamic acid derivatives (flufenamic acid, meclofenamic acid, mefenamic acid, niflumic acid and tolfenamic acid), biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives (diflunisal and flufenisal), oxicams (isoxicam, piroxicam, sudoxicam and tenoxican), salicylates (acetyl salicylic acid, sulfasalazine) and the pyrazolones (apazone, bezpiperylon, feprazone, mofebutazone, oxyphenbutazone, phenylbutazone); (g) cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) inhibitors; (h) inhibitors of phosphodiesterase type IV (PDE-IV); (i) anti-diabetic agents such as insulin, sulfonylureas, biguanides (metformin), α-glucosidase inhibitors (acarbose) and glitazones (troglitazone, rosiglitazone and pioglitazone); (j) preparations of interferon beta (interferon beta-1.alpha, interferon beta-1.beta.); (k) other compounds such as 5-aminosalicylic acid and prodrugs thereof, antimetabolites such as methotrexate, azathioprine and 6-mercaptopurine, and cytotoxic cancer chemotherapeutic agents; and (l) agents that directly or indirectly interfere with cytokine signalling, such as soluble TNF receptors, TNF antibodies, soluble IL-1 receptors, IL-1 antibodies, and the like. The weight ratio of the compound of the present invention to the second active ingredient may be varied and will depend upon the effective dose of each ingredient. Generally, an effective dose of each will be used. Thus, for example, when a compound of the present invention is combined with an NSAID the weight ratio of the compound of the present invention to the NSAID will generally range from about 1000:1 to about 1:1000, preferably about 200:1 to about 1:200. Combinations of a compound of the present invention and other active ingredients will generally also be within the aforementioned range, but in each case, an effective dose of each active ingredient should be used.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Reagents and solvents used below can be obtained from commercial sources such as Aldrich Chemical Co. (Milwaukee, Wis., USA). 1H-NMR spectra were recorded on a Varian Gemini 400 MHz NMR spectrometer. Significant peaks are tabulated in the order: multiplicity (s, singlet; d, doublet; t, triplet; q, quartet; m, multiplet; br s, broad singlet), coupling constant(s) in Hertz (Hz) and number of protons. Electron Ionization (EI) mass spectra were recorded on a Hewlett Packard 5989A mass spectrometer. Mass spectrometry results are reported as the ratio of mass over charge, followed by the relative abundance of each ion (in parentheses). In tables, a single m/e value is reported for the M+H (or, as noted, M−H) ion containing the most common atomic isotopes. Isotope patterns correspond to the expected formula in all cases. Electrospray ionization (ESI) mass spectrometry analysis was conducted on a Hewlett-Packard 1100 MSD electrospray mass spectrometer using the HP1100 HPLC for sample delivery. Normally the analyte was dissolved in methanol at 0.1 mg/mL and 1 microliter (μL) was infused with the delivery solvent into the mass spectrometer, which scanned from 100 to 1500 daltons. All compounds could be analyzed in the positive ESI mode, using 1:1 acetonitrile/water with 1% acetic acid as the delivery solvent. The compounds provided below could also be analyzed in the negative ESI mode, using 2 mM NH4OAc in acetonitrile/water as delivery solvent
  • Preparation of Synthetic Intermediates
  • Method A
  • For compounds of the invention in which W═N and X═CH, and the corresponding α-keto lactam (i.e., isatin) is commercially available or can be prepared by known methods.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00017
    Preparation of Intermediate iii
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00018
  • To a solution of the aldehyde iv (22.0 g, 98.0 mmol; prepared according to Walters, et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1994, 35, 8307-8310) in 200 mL of THF at 0° C. was added a 3.0 M solution of MeMgCl (39 mL, 117.0 mmol) in THF. The reaction was stirred for 30 min and quenched with a saturated NH4Cl solution. The solids were removed by filtration, the filtrate was dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness to obtain a solid. The crude product and MnO2 (36.0 g) were stirred vigorously in 100 mL of benzene for 18 h. More MnO2 (5.0 g) was added and the mixture was stirred for another 3 h. The reaction was filtered through Celite, the solids were washed with EtOAc, and the filtrate was concentrated to give a solid. The crude product was purified by chromatography (silica gel, hexanes/acetone, 85:15) to give the desired ketone v as a solid (16 g, 68%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.00 (s, 1H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 0.92 (s, 9H), 0.36 (s, 6H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00019
  • To a mixture of isatin (1.2 g, 8.15 mmol, Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis., USA) and 5-acetyl-2-t-butyldimethylsilyl-1-methyl imidazole (2.0 g, 8.4 mmol, prepared in Step 1) in 10 mL of EtOH/water (1:1) was added potassium hydroxide (2.0 g, 35.6 mmol). The dark-red solution was stirred in an oil bath at 80° C. for 18 h. The reaction was cooled in an ice bath, diluted with water (5 mL) and acetic acid (2 mL) was added. The precipitate was collected by filtration, washed with water, and dried to give the desired product vi (1.3 g). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.54 (dd, J=8.5, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 8.0 (dd, J=8.3, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.73 (ddd, J=8.3, 6.7, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (ddd, J=8.3, 6.8, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 4.14 (s, 3H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00020
  • The acid vi (500 mg, 1.99 mmol) was dissolved in 5 mL of MeOH and conc. H2SO4 (1.0 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was heated at reflux for 22 h and brought to room temperature. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was dissolved with water and adjusted to basic pH by the addition of solid K2CO3. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with EtOAc. The organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to dryness to give the desired ester iii (300 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.47 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.08 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.93-7.87 (br s, 2H), 7.84 (br t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (br t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 4.02 (s, 3H).
  • A number of variously substituted isatins are available from commercial sources. Alternatively, literature methods described their preparation from the corresponding anilines (or equivalent aromatic amines). For example, substituted isatins can be prepared via a Sandmeyer procedure (see, Simon J. Garden, Jose C. Torres, Alexandra A. Ferreira, Rosangela B. Silva, Angelo C. Pinto; Tetrahedron Letters 38, 9, 1501, (1997) and references cited therein); a formanilide method (see, Otto, et al., Tetrahedron Letters 37, 52, 9381, (1996)); a Stolle type procedure (see Soll, et al., J. Org. Chem. 53, 2844 (1988)); a Stolle-Becker (oxalyl chloride) procedure (see, Baumgarten, et al., J. Org. Chem. 26, 1536 (1961)); α keto amides (see, Fumiyuki, et al., J. Org. Chem. 51, 415, (1986)); a Gassman method (see, Gassman, et al., J. Org. Chem. 42, 8, 1344, (1977)); ortho-lithiated anilines (see, Hewawasam, et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 35, 7303, (1994); an oxindole route (see, Kraynack et al., Tetrahedron Letters, 39, 7679, (1998); and via bis(alkylthio)carbenes (see Rigby, and Danca, Tetrahedron Letters 40, 689,(1999).
  • Method B
  • Preparation of Intermediate vii
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00021
  • A solution of the amide viii (1.87 g, 10.6 mmol) in 20 mL of THF was cooled to −78° C. under nitrogen. A 2.32 M solution of n-BuLi (11.4 mL, 26.5 mmol) in THF was added to the cold solution, which was then stirred at −5° C. for 3 h. The reaction was cooled to −78° C. and diethyl oxalate (3.65 mL, 26.5 mmol) was added. The reaction was allowed to reach room temperature and was quenched with water, followed by EtOAc. The aqueous phase was extracted three times with EtOAc, the organic extracts were combined, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness to obtain an oil (1.8 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography (silica gel, CH2Cl2/MeOH, 97:3) to give the desired ketoester ix as an oil (680 mg, 23%).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00022
  • A mixture of the ketoester ix (680 mg, 2.44 mmol), 5-acetyl-2-t-butyldimethylsilyl-1-methyl imidazole v (660 mg, 2.76 mmol), and potassium hydroxide (564 mg, 10.07 mmol) in 6 mL of EtOH/water (1:1) was placed in an oil bath at 80° C. for 18 h. The reaction was brought to room temperature, concentrated to remove the EtOH, diluted with 3 mL of water, and 1 mL of AcOH was added. The solution was refrigerated for 24 h, at which point a solid precipitate was collected, washed with water, and dried to give the desired acid x (200 mg, 32%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 9.26 (s, 1H), 8.60 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (d, J=5.7 Hz, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.77 (s, 1H), 4.15 (s, 3H).
  • The corresponding ester of this acid can be prepared as described in Method A, Step 3, or other standard methods known to those of skill in the art. Alternatively, this acid can be converted directly into the corresponding aldehyde using methods well known in the art.
  • Method C
  • Preparation of Intermediate xi
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00023
  • This method is a variation on Method B; above. In this method, metal-halogen exchange is used instead of direct metallation of an aniline derivative.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00024
  • A solution of the required carbamate xii (1.74 g, 6.37 mmol; prepared according to Venuti et al., J. Med. Chem. 1988, 31, 2136) in 20 mL of THF was cooled to −78° C. under nitrogen. A 2.2-M solution of n-BuLi (6.1 mL, 13.4 mmol) in THF was added to the cold solution and the mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 1 h. Diethyl oxalate (1.04 mL, 7.64 mmol) was added and the reaction was allowed to reach room temperature. The reaction was quenched with 10% aqueous NH4Cl and diluted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness to obtain an oil (1.79 g). The crude product was purified by chromatography (silica gel, hexanes/EtOAc, 4:1) to give the desired ketoester xiii as an oil (1.1 g, 58%).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00025
  • A mixture of the ketoester xiii (1.0 g, 3.4 mmol), 5-acetyl-2-t-butyldimethylsilyl-1-methyl imidazole v (882 mg, 3.7 mmol), and potassium hydroxide (760 mg, 13.6 mmol) in 8 mL of EtOH/water (1:1) was placed in an oil bath at 80° C. for 24 h. The reaction was brought to room temperature, diluted with 20 mL of water, and 2 mL of AcOH was added. The yellow solution was refrigerated for 4 h and the yellow needles that formed were collected by filtration, washed with water and ether, and dried to give the desired acid xiv (163 mg, 19%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 9.02 (dd, J=4.3, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 8.55 (dd, J=8.5, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 8.01 (d, J=1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (dd, J=8.5, 4.3 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 4.15 (s, 3H).
  • The corresponding ester of this acid can be prepared as described in Method A, Step 3, or by other methods known in the art. Alternatively, this acid can be converted directly into the corresponding aldehyde or ketone by known methods.
  • Method D
  • An alternative method of assembling the final framework involves a tin-mediated coupling as indicated below.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00026
  • To a stirred solution of 2-hydroxyquinoline-4carboxylic acid (Lancaster, Windham, USA) (10 g, 50 mmol), anhydrous potassium carbonate (10.35 g, 75 mmol) and anhydrous DMF (200 mL) at room temperature under nitrogen was added iodomethane (6.14 mL, 100 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 16 h, then poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (150 mL). The resulting solid was washed with water (2×50 mL) and dried by suction to afford the desired product xv (9.1 g, 90%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 12.14 (br s, 1H), 8.05 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.55-7.60 (m, 1H), 7.39 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.21-7.28 (m, 1H), 6.85 (s, 1H), 3.93 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 204.1 (100, M+H+).
  • A solution of 4-carbomethoxy-2-quinolinone xv (655 mg, 3 mmol) and POBr3 (1.9 g, 10 mmol) in toluene (20 mL) was heated at reflux for 2 h, then allowed to cool to room temperature and poured into ice water (25 mL). The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL). The organic extract was combined, washed with water and brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (hexane:EtOAc 4:1) afforded the desired product ivi (400 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.52-8.57 (m, 1H), 8.04-8.08 (m, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 7.88-7.92 (m, 1H), 7.76-7.81 (m, 1H), 3.98 (s, 3H).
  • A solution of 4-tributylstannyl-1-titylimidazole (474 mg, 0.79 mmol; prepared according to Elguero et al., Synthesis, 1997, 563) and 2-bromo-4-carbomethoxy-quinoline xvi (145 mg, 0.53 mmol) in DMF was degassed with nitrogen for 5 min. Pd2(dba)3 (49 mg, 0.053 mmol), cuprous iodide (20 mg, 0.1 mmol) and triphenyl arsine (32 mg, 0.10 mmol) were added, and the mixture was stirred at 60° C. for 16 h. The mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature and was filtered through celite (eluting with 50 mL ethyl acetate). Water (50 mL) was added and the organic extract was collected and washed with water (3×50 mL), brine (1×50 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (gradient elution: hexane to hexane:EtOAc 3:1) afforded the desired product xvii (173 mg, 66%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.62 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 8.04-8.07 (m, 2H), 7.17-7.76 (m, 17H), 4.04 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 496.3 (100, M+H+).
  • The general synthetic methodology of Method D can also be applied to other aromatic halides. For example:
    Preparation of Intermediate xix
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00027
  • To a solution of 1-methyl-5-(tributylstannyl)imidazole (9.5 g, 25.6 mmol, Gaare, et al, Acta Chem. Scand. 1993, 47(1), 57-62) in 75 mL of anhydrous benzene which had been degassed by bubbling nitrogen through it for 5 min. was added the chloro quinoline xviii (4.1 g, 21.3 mmol, Hasegawa, Pharm. Bull. 1953, 47-50). To this solution was added tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (1.06 mmol, 1.23 g). The reaction was heated at reflux for 14 h, at which time it was cooled, the volume of solvent reduced to about 15 mL under vacuum and the solution placed on a silica gel column. The column was eluted with 5% MeOH in methylene chloride to give 3.5 g of the alcohol xix.
  • 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.02 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), δ 7.99 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 7.73 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (s, 1H), 5.64 (t, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 5.04 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 2H), 4.15 (s, 3H).
  • This alcohol can then be converted into the corresponding aldehyde as described for Example 1.9, or by other methods well known in the art.
  • Method E
  • This method is a variation on Method D, although in this case the fused A ring is not aromatic, and an aromatic triflate is used in the coupling reaction.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00028
  • A mixture of ethyl 3-cyano-2-hydroxy-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-quinoline-4-carboxylate xx (7.8 g, 0.032 mol; prepared according to Snyder, Org. Synth., II, 531 and Isler et al., Helv. Chim. Acta, 1955, 38, 1033) in water (9 mL) and conc. H2SO4 (9 mL) was heated at reflux for 3 days. The mixture was cooled and diluted with water. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration and washed with water to give the desired carboxylic acid (4.4 g, 71%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 6.34 (s, 1H), 2.10-2.20 (m, 4H), 1.61-1.70 (m, 4H); ESI-MS m/z 192.1 (100, M−H+).
  • To the carboxylic acid (4.4 g, 22 mmol) was added thionyl chloride (30 mL) and the mixture was heated at reflux for 1 h, then allowed to cool to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo. To the residue was added ethanol (20 mL) and the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 min. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo to afford ester xxi (3.4 g, 70%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 6.80 (s, 1H), 4.17 (q, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.65-2.75 (m, 4H) 1.66-1.85 (m, 4H), 1.29 (t, J=7 Hz, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 222.2 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of pyridone xxi (400 mg, 1.8 mmol) in anhydrous dichloromethane (15 mL) at 0° C. under nitrogen was added diisopropylethylamine (347 μl, 1.98 mmol) and triflic anhydride (192 μl, 1.8 mmol). After 3 h, saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate (10 mL) was added and the organic layer was collected, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (hexane:EtOAc 95:5) afforded the desired pyridine triflate xxii (173 mg, 27%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.26 (s, 1H), 4.19 (q, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.83-3.07 (m, 4H) 1.79-1.94 (m, 4H) 1.30 (t, J=7 Hz, 3H). ESI-MS m/z 354.0 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of triflate xxii (173 mg, 0.48 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (5 mL) was added tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (60 mg, 0.05 mmol), lithium chloride (67 mg, 1.5 mmol) and 1-methyl-5-(tributylstannyl)imidazole (216 mg, 0.58 mmol) and the mixture was degassed with nitrogen for 5 min. The mixture was heated at reflux for 18 h under nitrogen, then cooled and diluted with dichloromethane and water. The organic layer was collected, washed with brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (CH2Cl2 to CH2Cl2:MeOH 1.5:98.5) afforded the desired product xxiii (168 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.63 (s, 1H), 7.41 (s, 1H), 7.43 (s, 1H), 4.39 (q, J=7 Hz, 2H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 2.83-3.07 (m, 4H), 1.78-1.95 (m, 4H), 1.29 (t, J=7 Hz, 3H). MS m/z 286.2 (100, M+H+).
  • Method F
  • This method also illustrates a variation to Method D, but in this case W═X═CH (utilizing a naphthalene framework).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00029
  • To a solution of methyl 3-nitro-2-naphtholate (purchased from TCI, 1.62 g, 7.0 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) and EtOAc (20 mL) was added 10% Pd—C (0.16 g) and the mixture was stirred overnight under 1 atm H2. Filtration and concentration of the filtrate afforded a brown solid (xxiv) that was dried under vacuum and used directly without further purification. To the above solid was added conc. HCl (3.1 mL), water (3.1 mL) and ice (6.5 g) and the resulting mixture was cooled in ice bath. While maintaining the reaction temperature below 5° C., NaNO2 (0.51 g, 7.3 mmol) in water (3.3 mL) was added dropwise. After 30 min, a solution of KI (1.17 g, 7.00 mmol) in water (3 mL) was added and the reaction was stirred overnight at rt. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×30 mL) and the combined organic extracts were sequentially washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3, Na2S2O3 and NaCl solutions and dried (MgSO4). Concentration followed by column chromatography (CH2Cl2:hexane/1:2) gave the desired naphthyl iodide xxv as a pale yellow solid (1.15 g).
  • A mixture of aryl iodide xxv (758 mg, 2.4 mmol), Ph3As (151 mg, 0.5 mmol), CuI (92 mg, 0.48 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (233 mg, 0.24 mmol) and 3-tributylstannyl-1-tritylimidazole (1.46 g, 2.40 mmol; prepared according to xx J. Org. Chem. 1991, 56, 5739) in DMF (25 mL) was purged with nitrogen for 5 min and then heated to 65° C. for 4 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum and partitioned between CH2Cl2 (200 mL) and aqueous sodium bicarbonate (100 mL). The organic layer was washed with brine and dried (MgSO4). Concentration followed by column chromatography (CH2Cl2:MeOH/100:1) afforded the desired product xxvi as a gray solid (1.3 g).
  • Method G
  • This method illustrates the homologation of the A ring at the stage of one of the intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00030
  • To a solution of xxvii (2.2 g, 5.6 mmol, prepared according to Method A from the iodoistatin) in THF (180 mL) at −78° C. was added dropwise DIBAL-H in toluene (1M, 22.4 mL, 22.4 mmol). The reaction was warmed to 0° C. After 3 h, saturated aqueous NH4Cl (100 mL) was added and the mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (10×200 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine and dried (MgSO4). Removal of the solvent gave the desired alcohol xxviii as a white solid (2.0 g) which was carried on with out purification. To a solution of the alcohol (2.0 g, 5.5 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (200 mL) was added Dess-Martin reagent (4.3 g, 8.8 mmol) at room temperature. After 1 h, the reaction was quenched by adding saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (100 mL) and saturated aqueous Na2S2O3 (100 mL). The organic layer was separated, washed with brine and dried (MgSO4). Concentration, followed by column chromatography (CH2Cl2:MeOH/30:1) gave the corresponding aldehyde xxix as a yellow solid (1.7 g).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00031
  • A mixture of aldehyde xxix (195 mg, 0.54 mmol), 4-hydroxyphenylboronic acid (172 mg, 0.81 mmol), PdCl2(dppf)2 (136 mg, 0.17 mmol) and potassium carbonate (344 mg, 2.5 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was purged with nitrogen and heated to 65° C. overnight. The solvent was removed under vacuum and the resulting mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL). After washing with brine and drying (MgSO4), removal of the solvent followed by column chromatography (CH2Cl2:MeOH/20:1) gave xxx as a yellow solid (56 mg), which was utilized without further purification.
  • Method H
  • This method exemplifies yet other types of homologation of the A ring at the stage of one of the intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00032
  • To a solution of the ester xxvii (1.2 g, 3.05 mmol, prepared according to Method A) in THF at −78° C. under nitrogen was added a 1.0 M solution of LiAlH4 (4 mL, 4.0 mmol) in THF. The reaction was stirred for 1 h, quenched with water, and allowed to reach room temperature. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc and the organic extract was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to give a solid. The crude product was dissolved in 50 mL of MeOH and treated with NaBH4 (200 mg, 5.3 mmol). The reaction was stirred for 15 min, water was added, and the precipitate that formed was collected by filtration to give an intermediate iodo-alcohol (750 mg).
  • A mixture of the iodo alcohol (300 mg, 0.82 mmol), 3-butyn-1-ol (0.1 mL, 1.32 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (50 mg, 0.04 mmol), CuI (10 mg, 0.05 mmol), and triethylamine (1 mL) in 2 mL of DMF was stirred at 80° C. for 1 h. The reaction was cooled, diluted with water, and the precipitate that formed was collected by filtration. The crude product was dissolved in 10 mL of EtOH/MeOH (1:1) and was hydrogenated with 10% Pd/C (100 mg) at 45 psi H2 for 3 days. The reaction was filtered and the solids were washed with CH2Cl2 and MeOH. The filtrate was concentrated to dryness to give the desired diol xxxi (100 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 7.92 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 7.78 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (dd, J=8.6, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 5.70 (br s, 1H), 5.00 (s, 2H), 4.43 (br s, 1H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 3.43 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 2.78 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.76-1.64 (m, 2H), 1.54-1.41 (m, 2H).
  • Additional examples of homologation of one of the intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00033
  • N-Iodosuccinimide (25.0 g, 119.5 mmol) was added to a stirred mixture of 6-trifluoromethylisatin (10.3 g, 47.8 mmol) and triflic acid (75 g) at 0° C. under nitrogen. The ice bath was removed and stirring at room temperature was continued for 7 h. The mixture was poured into ice-water and was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic extracts were evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue was triturated with CHCl3 to produce a yellow-orange solid. Filtration of the crude solid and purification by recrystallization from CHCl3 gave 5-iodo-6-trifluoromethylisatin xxxiii (10.4 g) as an orange solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 7.17(s, 1H), 8.08(s, 1H), 11.27(s, 1H); ms 340.0 (M−H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00034
  • A mixture of 5-iodo-6-trifluoromethylisatin (7.50 g, 22.0 mmol) and the methylketone v (5.24 g, 22.0 mmol, prepared as described in Method A) in EtOH (50 mL) was treated with a solution of KOH (4.93 g, 88.0 mmol) in 50 mL of water. The mixture was heated overnight at 85° C. and then cooled to 0° C. 1N HCl (88 mL) was added to the mixture dropwise while a precipitate was formed. The precipitate was collected, rinsed with ice-water and dried under vacuum, which gave crude acid (8.0 g): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.14(s, 1H), 7.98(s, 1H), 8.03(s, 1H), 8.41(s, 1H), 8.44(s, 1H), 9.42(s, 1H); ms 448.0(M+H+).
  • Sulfuric acid (3.5 mL) was added to a stirred solution of the crude acid (8.0 g) in MeOH (120 mL), and the mixture was refluxed for 48 h. The resulting mixture was cooled and a precipitate was collected. Rinsing with cold methanol gave the corresponding methyl ester xxxiv (5.84 g in two steps) as a pure off-white solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.04(s, 1H), 4.29(s, 1H), 8.56(s, 1H), 8.57(s, 1H), 8.65(s, 1H), 9.08(s, 1H), 9.39(s, 1H); ms 462.0(M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00035
  • To a mixture of the 6-iodo-7-trifluoromethyl methyl ester xxxiv (615 mg, 1.33 mmol), PdCl2(PPh3)2 (234 mg, 0.33 mmol), and CuI (38 mg, 0.15 mmol) in 1:1 DMF-Et3N (16 mL), methyl propargyl ether (0.34 mL, 4.02 mmol) was added at room temperature under nitrogen. Stirring at room temperature was continued for 4.5 h. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2. The CH2Cl2 solution was washed with water and brine, dried, and evaporated. Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave the crude methyl ether xxxv (300 mg).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00036
  • The crude methyl ether xxxv (300 mg) in MeOH (15 mL) was treated with 10% Pd/C (158 mg) and hydrogenated overnight at room temperature. The mixture was filtered and evaporated to give the crude saturated methyl ether xxxvi (125 mg).
  • Another example of homologation of the A ring of one of the intermediates is described in the following steps:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00037
  • To a mixture of tetrahydro-3-furanmethanol (Aldrich Chemical Co., 3.63 g, 35.6 mmol), N-methylmorpholine oxide (6.3 g, 53.8 mmol) and 4A molecular sieves (18 g) in CH2Cl2 (70 mL) at 0° C. was added TPAP (0.63 g, 1.8 mmol). After 2 h at rt, the reaction mixture was poured on the top of a short column and the product was eluted with ether (3×50 mL). Concentration followed by column chromatography (EtOAc:Hexane/1:2 to 1:1) afforded the aldehyde xxxvii (1.2 g) by careful concentration under reduced pressure at 0° C. To a solution of LDA [7.5 mmol, prepared from 2.5M n-BuLi (3.0 mL, 7.5 mmol) and diisopropylamine (1.26 mL, 9 mmol)] in THF (30 mL) at −78° C. was added 2 M TMSCHN2 (3.75 mL, 7.5 mmol). After 30 min at −78° C., the aldehyde xxxvii (0.5 g, 5 mmol) was added and the mixture was warmed to room temperature over 2 h Then water (20 mL) was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl ether (2×30 mL). The combined organic layers were dried and removal of the solvent by careful concentration under reduced pressure at 0° C. gave 3-ethynyltetrahydrofuran xxxvii as a colorless liquid.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00038
  • Compound xl was prepared by the methodology of Method H, using iodoester xxvii and 3-ethynyltetrahydrofuran. 1H-NMR (CDCl3) δ: 1.59-1.66 (m, 1H), 1.84-1.88 (m, 2H), 2.08-2.18 (m, 1H), 2.23-2.37 (m, 1H), 2.79-2.93 (m, 2H), 3.44 (t, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 3.71-3.81 (m, 1H), 3.89-3.98 (m, 2H), 4.09 (s, 3H), 4.29 (s, 3H), 7.62 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (s, br, 2H), 8.03 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 8.55 (s, 1H);). ES-MS: m/z: 366 (M+1)+.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00039
  • Ester xlii was prepared by the methodology of Method H. 3-Ethynylpyridine was obtained from Aldrich Chemical Co. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ: 8.18 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 8.00 (s, 1H), 7.62 (s, 1H), 7.53 (dd, J=1.8, 8.5, 1H), 7.50 (m, 1H), 7.21 (m, 1H), 4.20 (s, 3H), 4.05 (s, 3H), 3.16 (m, 2H), 3.06 (m, 2H).
  • Method I
  • This method describes additional homologation strategies for the A ring of various intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00040
  • A solution of the ester xxvii (500 mg, 1.27 mmol), acrylonitrile (0.2 mL, 3.03 mmol), Pd(PPh3)4 (50 mg, 0.04 mmol), and triethylamine (0.5 mL) in 4 mL of DMF was stirred at 90° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, diluted with water, and the precipitate was collected by filtration. The residue was purified by chromatography (silica, CH2Cl2/MeOH, 96:4) to obtain the desired cyano ester xlii (250 mg, 62%). A suspension of this ester xliii (250 mg, 0.78 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (50 mg) in 10 mL of EtOH/MeOH (1:1) was hydrogenated at 45 psi for 18 h. The catalyst was filtered, washed with CH2Cl2 and MeOH, and the filtrate was concentrated to dryness to give the desired product as a solid (250 mg, quantitative). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.36 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 8.04 (J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 7.79 (dd, J=8.6, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 4.02 (s, 3H), 3.12 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.94 (t, J=6.7 Hz, 2H).
  • Another example of the methodology illustrated by Method I:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00041
  • To a mixture of 6-iodo-7- trifluoromethyl methyl ester xxxiv (661 mg, 1.43 mmol, prepared in Method H), P(o-tol)3 (872 mg, 2.87 mmol), NaOAc (259 mg, 3.15 mmol), and Pd(OAc)2 (322 mg, 1.43 mmol) in DMF (20 mL), acrylonitrile (5.0 mL, 76 mmol) was added at room temperature under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred and heated to 115° C. for 6 h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2, washed with water and brine, dried, and evaporated. Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave a (Z) and (E) mixture of the unsaturated nitrile xliv (253 mg) as a solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.03(s, 1.2H), 4.06(s, 1.8H), 4.17(s, 1.2H) 4.18(s, 1.8H), 6.28(d, J=12 Hz, 0.4H), 6.63(d, J=17 Hz, 0.6H), 7.78(d, J=12 Hz, 0.4H), 7.87(d, J=17 Hz, 0.6H), 7.96(s, 1H), 8.06(s, 1H), 8.48(s, 1H), 8.52(s, 1H), 8.89(s, 0.6H), 9.13(s, 0.4H); MS: 387.0(M+H+).
  • Method J
  • This method describes additional methodology for elaboration of the A ring of one of the intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00042
  • To a solution of the 7-iodoquinoline (440 mg, 1.12 mmol, prepared as in Method A) in dry, degassed acetonitrile, (28 mL) was added finely ground and dried NaCN (110 mg, 2.24 mmol), CuI (21.3 mg, 0.112 mmol), and Pd(PPh3)4 (65 mg; 0.056 mmol) under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred and heated to reflux for 1.5 h. The reaction was diluted with ethyl acetate, filtered and the filtrate was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography: (2.5% MeOH/CH2Cl2,) to yield xlvi (161.4 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 4.08 (s, 3H), 4.20 (s, 3H), 7.46 (ddd J=2.8, 3.8, 5.1 Hz 1H), 7.65 (m, 1H), 8.32 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.86 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00043
  • To a stirred solution of the 7-cyanoquinoline xlvi (119 mg, 0.41 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added LiBH4 (0.31 mL, 0.61 mmol, 2.0M/THF). The resulting solution was refluxed for 0.5 h, poured into water, extracted with ethyl acetate and washed with dilute HCl. The aqueous phase was basified and re-extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined ethyl acetate extracts were combined and reduced to dryness to give 34 mg of xlvii as a crude solid product, which was used in the next step without further purification. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.13 (s, 3H), 5.02 (s, 2H), 7.81-7.89 (m, 3H), 8.06 (s, 1H), 8.21 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H). MS 265.1.0 (M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00044
  • To a stirred solution of the crude alcohol xlvii (34 mg, 0.129 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added the Dess-Martin periodinane reagent (73 mg, 0.172 mmol). The solution was stirred for 1 h at room temperature, poured into water, extracted with CH2Cl2 and washed with 10% aqueous Na2S2O3, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, and brine. The organic solution was dried over Na2SO4. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to provide the corresponding aldehyde xlviii, 34.8 mg (two steps). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 4.25 (s, 3H), 7.70(s, 1H), 7.80 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 8.21 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 9.12 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00045
  • To a solution of ester xlv (430 mg, 1.09 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) at rt was added triethylamine (0.35 mL, 2.5 mmol) followed by dimethylamine (2.2 mL of a 2.0 M solution in THF, 4.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was gently purged with carbon monoxide for 5 min, Pd(PPh3)4 (115 mg, 0.10 mmol) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred under 1 atm of carbon monoxide at rt for 5 h and then at 70° C. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to rt and concentrated under vacuum. Chromatography (9:1/CH2Cl2:MeOH) of the residue afforded 173 mg of xlix sufficiently pure for further use. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ: 8.76 (d, J=8.7, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 7.74 (s, 1H), 7.63-7.60 (m, 2H), 4.19 (s, 3H), 4.07 (s, 3H), 3.18 (s, 3H), 3.05 (s, 3H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00046
  • To a solution of ester xlv (225 mg, 0.57 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added AsPh3 (15 mg, 0.05 mmol), CuI (11 mg, 0.06 mmol) and Pd2dba3 (22 mg, 0.02 mmol). The reaction mixture was purged with nitrogen for 5 min, vinyltributyltin (0.34 mL, 1.2 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was heated to 65° C. for 3 h. After pouring onto water and saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (15 mL each), the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×20 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated aqueous KF (2×20 mL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated. Chromatography (25:1/CH2Cl2:MeOH) provided 140 mg of product l. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ: 8.66 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.71 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (dd, J=11.0 17.6 Hz, 1H), 5.99 (d, J=17.6 Hz, 1H), 5.46 (d, J=11.0, 1H), 4.21 (s, 3H), 4.06 (s, 3H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00047
  • Magnesium turnings (240 mg, 9.95 mmol) were placed in a 3-neck flask containing dry THF (2 mL) and the flask was placed in a bath at 50° C. Cyclopropylbromide (0.79 mL, 10 mmol) was added dropwise under gentle reflux and the mixture was heated to reflux for 1 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture was added to a solution of zinc chloride in THF (1M, 20 mL, 10 mmol) at 0° C. and it was stirred at rt for 2 h. A solution of iodide xlv (393 mg, 1.0 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was added, followed by PdCl2(dppf)2 (41 mg, 0.05 mmol) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction was quenched by addition of saturated aqueous NH4Cl (10 mL) and saturated EDTA-sodium aqueous solution (10 mL). The resulting mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (3×30 mL), washed with brine and dried (MgSO4). Concentration followed by column chromatography (CH2Cl2:MeOH/30:1) gave the desired product li as a yellow solid (290 mg). 1H-NMR (CDCl3) δ: 0.91-0.94 (m, 2H), 1.13-1.16 (m, 2H), 2.12-2.15 (m, 1H), 4.08 (s, 3H), 4.28 (s, 3H), 7.37 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (s, 1H), 7.82 (s, br, 1H), 7.95 (s, br, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 8.64 (d, J=8.8 Hz). ES-MS: m/z: 308 (M+1)+.
  • Method K
  • This method describes additional methodology for the elaboration of the A ring of one of the intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00048
  • To a stirred solution of xlv (500 mg, 1.27 mmol) in dioxane (30 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen was added 1-(ethoxyvinyl)tri-n-butyl stannane (482 mg, 1.33 mmol) and (Ph3P)4Pd (catalytic amount, ˜5 mg) and the mixture was heated at 100° C. for 12 h. Additional amounts of 1-(ethoxyvinyl)tri-n-butylstannane (482 mg, 1.33 mmol) and (Ph3P)4Pd (catalytic amount, ˜5 mg) were added and the mixture stirred for 12 h at 100° C. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and flash chromatography (gradient elution CH2Cl2 to CH2Cl2:MeOH 98:2) afforded the desired product lii (350 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.52 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 8.71 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.60 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 4.80 (s, 1H), 4.29 (s, 1H), 4.07 (s, 3H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 3.90 (q, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 338.1 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of quinoline lii (350 mg, 1.0 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL) was added conc. sulfuric acid (0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature and quenched with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. Dichloromethane was added and the organic phase was collected, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an intermediate ketone (128 mg). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.80 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.14 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 7.60 (s, 1H), 4.12 (s, 3H), 4.05 (s, 3H), 2.80 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 310.1 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of intermediate ketone (128 mg, 0.41 mmol) in anhydrous methanol (5 mL) at 0° C. was added sodium borohydride (31 mg, 0.82 mmol) under nitrogen and the mixture was stirred for 2 h, then quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (10 mL) and diluted with dichloromethane (60 mL). The organic phase was collected, washed with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (gradient elution —CH2Cl2 99:1 to CH2Cl2:MeOH 97:3) afforded an intermediate alcohol (115 mg, 90%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.63 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.44-7.63 (m, 3H), 5.04 (q, J=7 Hz, 1H), 4.14 (s, 3H), 4.07 (s, 3H), 1.60 (d, J=7 Hz, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 312.2 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of the intermediate alcohol (115 mg, 0.36 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen was added imidazole (63 mg, 0.93 mmol) and tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (444 μl of a 1.0 M solution in THF, 0.44 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 h then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was taken up in dichloromethane and washed with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride and brine. The organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (gradient elution CH2Cl2 to CH2Cl2:MeOH 97.5:2.5) afforded liii (127 mg, 84%). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.60 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.93 (s, 1H), 7.45-7.60 (m, 3H), 4.51 (q, J=6 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (s, 3H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 1.40 (d, J=6 Hz, 3H), 0.82 (s, 9H), 0.02 (s, 3H), −0.04 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 426.2 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00049
  • Copper powder (ca. 1 micron, 0.31 g, 4.82 mmol), and DMSO (4 mL) were charged to a resealable pressure tube and cooled to 0° C. Pentafluoroethyl iodide(0.3 mL, 626 mg, 2.54 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 110° C.-120° C. for 4 h. After cooling to room temperature, the blue-green reagent was removed and added to intermediate xlv(237 mg, 0.605 mmol). The mixture was heated to 65° C. for 1 h. The cooled mixture was poured into 1N HCl (20 mL) and THF (20 mL). The organic phase was separated, washed with water, brine, dried and evaporated Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave the pentafluoroethyl compound liv (180 mg) as a pure solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.03 (s, 3H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 7.88 (d, J=9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.92 (s, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.74 (d, J=9.4 Hz, 1H); ms 386.1(M+H +).
  • Method L
  • This method describes the synthesis of compounds in which the B ring is linked to the remainder of the molecule via a nitrogen atom.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00050
  • A stirred solution of 4-carbomethoxy quinolin-2-one (prepared as shown in Method D (1.76 g, 9 mmol), POCl3 (4.6 g, 30 mmol) in toluene (40 mL) was heated at reflux for 2 h then allowed to cool to room temperature and poured into ice water (50 mL). The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL). The organics were combined, washed with water, brine, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo to afford the desired 2-chloro-4-carbomethoxyquinoline lv (1.50 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.54 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 8.03-8.06 (m, 1H), 7.89-7.94 (m, 2H), 7.75-7.77 (m, 1H), 3.98 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 222.1 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of 2-chloro-4-carbomethoxyquinoline lv (346 mg, 1.5 mmol) in anhydrous n-butanol (5 mL) was added imidazole (212 mg, 3 mmol) and the mixture was heated at reflux for 48 h then imidazole (212 mg, 3 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated at reflux for a further 12 h then cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography afforded the desired product lvi as the n-butyl ester (152 mg, 34%); 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.56 (d, 1H, J=8 Hz), 8.56 (s, 1H) 8.10 (d, 1H, J=8 Hz), 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 7.93-7.83 (m, 1H) 7.65-7.67 (m, 1H) 7.28 (s, 1H) 4.51 (t, J=8 Hz, 3H) 1.82-1.88 (m, 2H), 1.50-1.56 (m, 2H), 1.03 (t, J=8 Hz, 3H) 2.96 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 296.1 (100, M+H+).
    Method M
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00051
  • To a stirred solution of methyl magnesium chloride (1.6 mL of a 3.0 M solution in THF, 4.8 mmol) in anhydrous THF (16 ml) at −78° C. under an atmosphere of nitrogen was added a solution of zinc bromide (1.08 g, 4.8 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 1 h then warmed to room temperature whereupon a mixture of tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0) (228 mg, 0.20 mmol) and 2,4-dichloroquinazoline lvii (800 mg, 0.40 mmol, see Butler, et al., J. Chem. Soc. 1959, 1512) were added as a solution in THF (11 mL). The mixture was then heated at 50° C. for 12 h then cooled to 0° C. and quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride and diluted with ethyl acetate. The organics were collected, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (EtOAc:hexane 1:5 afforded the desired product lviii as a white solid (410 mg, 57%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.07 (d, J=9 Hz, 1H), 7.88-7.92 (m, 2H), 7.61-7.64 (m, 1H) 2.93 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 179.1 (100, M+H+).
  • A stirred solution of 2-chloro-4-methyl quinazoline lviii (250 mg, 1.4 mmol), 1-methyl-(5-tri-n-butylstannyl) imidazole (523 mg, 1.4 mmol, Gaare, et al., Acta Chem. Scand., 47:57 (1993)), triphenyl arsine (43 mg, 0.14 mmol), Pd2(dba)3 (63 mg, 0.07 mmol) and CuI (26 mg) in DMF (5 mL) was purged with nitrogen gas for 5 min. then stirred under nitrogen at 60° C. for 12 h. The mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature then diluted with ethylacetate and water. The organics were collected, washed with water, saturated aqueous KF and water then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (gradient elution CH2Cl2:MeOH 99:1 to 96:4) afforded the desired product lix as a white solid (243 mg, 77%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.05-8.10 (m, 2H), 7.79-7.98 (m, 2H) 7.50-7.66 (m, 2H) 4.22 (s, 3H) 2.96 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 225.2 (100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of quinazoline lvix (78 mg, 0.34 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (2 mL) was added selenium dioxide (54 mg, 0.48 mmol) and the mixture was heated at reflux for 150 min. The mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, filtered and concentrated to approx. 5 mL. Flash chromatography (CH2Cl2:MeOH 95:5) afforded the aldehyde which was concentrated to 10 mL volume then water (2 mL) and ethanol (10 mL) were added. The mixture was again concentrated to 5 mL and ethanol (10 mL) was added and the mixture again concentrated to 2 mL. The solution of aldehyde lx was taken on directly to the following reaction.
  • Method N
  • The following example is a variation of Method M in which the B ring is attached to the central ring via a nitrogen atom.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00052
  • To a stirred solution of methyl magnesium chloride (1.62 mL of a 3.0M solution in THF, 4.8 mmol) in THF (16 mL) at −78° C. under nitrogen was added zinc bromide (1.09 g, 4.8 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 1 h and then allowed to warm to room temperature whereupon tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (233 mg, 0.02 mmol) and 1,3dichloroisoquinoline lxi (800 mg, 4.0 mmol, Robinson, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1958, 80, 5481) were added. The mixture was stirred at 50 ° C. for 12 h then cooled to 0° C. Saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (10 mL) and ethyl acetate (60 mL) were added and the organics separated, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (hexane:EtOAc 7:1) afforded the desired product lxii (597 mg, 84%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.03-8.05 (m, 1H), 7.52-7.55 (m, 4H) 2.92 (s, 3H); GCMS m/z 177 (100, M+).
  • To a stirred suspension of sodium hydride (159 mg, 6.6 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added imidazole (562 mg, 8.2 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) and the mixture was allowed to stir at room temperature for 2 h whereupon a solution of 3-chloro-1-methyl isoquinoline lxii (293 mg, 1.6 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added. The mixture was then stirred at 120° C. for 48 h, cooled and quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (20 mL) and diluted with dichloromethane (50 mL). The organics were collected, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography (gradient elution CH2Cl2:MeOH 99:1 to 95:5) afforded the desired product lxiii (106 mg, 32%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 8.22 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H) 7.80-7.82 (m, 1H), 7.62-7.67 (m, 2H), 7.51-7.60 (m, 1H) 7.44 (s, 1H) 7.21 (s, 1H), 2.97 (s, 3H).
  • To a stirred solution of isoquinoline lxiii (165 mg, 0.78 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (5 mL) was added selenium dioxide (438 mg, 3.9 mmol) and the mixture was heated at reflux for 14 h then cooled to room temperature, filtered and the filtrate concentrated to approx. 5 mL. Flash chromatography (CH2Cl2:MeOH) afforded the desired product lxiv as indicated by mass spectrometry.
  • Method O
  • This method describes additional ways of modifying the A ring of one of the intermediates.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00053
  • To a stirred solution of 4-nitro-2-trifluoromethylanisole (20.4 g, 92.3 mmol, Aldrich) in MeOH (205 mL) was added Pd.C (612 mg) followed by a balloon of H2 gas. The reaction was stirred overnight, filtered through Celite to give, after solvent removal, the aniline lxv (17.6 g). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 3.54 (br s, 2H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 6.80 (dd, J=4, 12 Hz, 1H), 6.85 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=4 Hz, 1H)
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00054
  • Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (29.0 g, 0.133 mol) was added to a solution of 4-methoxy-3-trifluoromethylaniline lxv (23.1 g, 0.12 mol) in THF (75 mL). The resulting solution was refluxed overnight, cooled and the solvent removed under reduced pressure, the resulting black oil was chromatographed (hexane/ethyl acetate as eluant) to give 24.6 g of the product lxvi. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.48 (s, 9H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 7.17 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 7.61(d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 7.81(s, 1H), 9.42 (s, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00055
  • To a stirred solution of intermediate lxvi (18.5 g, 63.5 mmol) in dry THF (200 mL) at −78° C. under N2 was added tert-BuLi (90 mL, 152 mmol, 1.7M/hexane). After 3 h diethyl oxalate (10.3 mL, 76.2 mmol) was added at once. This mixture was stirred for 0.5 h and kept at −30° C. for 14 h. At this time all solvent was removed and the dry residue treated with THF (250 mL) and 3M HCl (250 mL)and subsequently refluxed for 4 h. The reaction was cooled and the THF removed. The solid isatin precipitated out of solution during this time. It was filtered, washed with H2O to yield 8.2 g of pure 5-methoxy-6-trifluoromethylisatin lxvii. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 3.89 (s, 3H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 10.99(s, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00056
  • To a stirred mixture of the isatin (335 mg, 1.37 mmol) under N2 at −78° C. in CH2Cl2 (3 mL) was added BBr3 (2.5 mL, 27.4 mmol) dropwise. The mixture was allowed to reach room temperature in the course of being stirred overnight. The mixture was then carefully poured on ice and the residue extracted with ethyl acetate. Chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) yielded 127 mg of intermediate lxviii. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 6.94 (s, 1H), 7.19 (s, 1H), 10.67(s, 1H), 10.92(s, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00057
  • To a stirred solution of the isatin lxviii (256 mg, 1.1 mmol) in DMF was added TBDPSiCl (457 mg, 1.66 mmol) and imidazole (226 mg, 3.3 mmol) then heated to 55° C. for 1 h. The mixture was poured into H2O extracted with ether and chromatographed (4:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) yield 357 mg of lxix. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 0.31 (s, 6H), 0.90 (s, 9H), 7.08 (s, 2H), 11.05 (s, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00058
  • A solution of the isatin lxix (504 mg, 2.18 mmol), imidazole v (571 mg, 2.4 mmol) in AcOH (7 mL) and conc HCl (2.2 mL) was refluxed for 9 days. At this time the solvents were removed, the dry residue was dissolved in MeOH (5 mL) and conc H2SO4 (catalytic) was added, and the solution was refluxed overnight. The majority of the solvent was removed and a saturated NaCl solution was added. The solid precipitate was filtered and collected. Yield of lxx: 275 mg two steps.
  • Alternatively:
  • To a stirred solution of the isatin lxix (215 mg, 0.46 mmol) and imidazole v (109 mg, 0.46 mmol) in EtOH (1 mL) was added Et3N (0.16 mL, 1.15 mmol) dropwise, and the resulting solution was stirred overnight. At this time a precipitate formed which was filtered off (88 mg). The remaining filtrate was dried under reduced pressure and the resulting residue was combined with the solid and subjected to THF (1.7 mL) and conc HCl (0.68 mL). This mixture was refluxed overnight, then dried to a residue under reduced pressure, MeOH (5.0 mL) and H2SO4 (0.2 mL) was added and the mixture refluxed overnight. A solid precipitated, lxx, was filtered and collected. Yield: 100 mg in three steps. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.02 (s, 3H), 4.28 (s, 3H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.42 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 9.10 (s, 1H), 11.61 (s, 1H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00059
  • To stirred solution of intermediate lxx (355.4 mg, 1.00 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added K2CO3 (152 mg, 1.10 mmol) at 0° C., after 15 min. bromoacetonitrile (0.14 mL, 2.0 mmol) was added at room temperature. After 1 h the reaction mixture was placed in an oil bath, 55° C. and heated for 1.5 h. At this time an additional amount of bromoacetonitrile (0.14 mL, 2.0 mmol) was added. The reaction was kept for two more h at 55° C. when another 2 mmol of bromoacetonitrile was added. Heating (40-50° C.) was continued overnight. At this time the mixture was poured into water, extracted with diethyl ether, washed with sat. NaHCO3 and brine to give after solvent removal the crude product lxxi. Yield: 187 mg.
    • Example 1
  • This example illustrates a procedure for the conversion of a derivatized aromatic ester or aldehyde into a desired compound of formula I.
    1.1 Preparation of Aldehyde lxxii
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00060
  • A solution of the ester iii (1.7 g, 6.4 mmol, prepared as described by Method A) in 20 mL of THF was cooled to −78° C. under nitrogen. A 1.0 M solution of LiAlH4 (7 mL, 7.0 mmol) in THF was added and the reaction stirred at the same temperature for 90 min. The reaction was quenched with water, allowed to reach room temperature, diluted with EtOAc and washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to give a mixture of the corresponding aldehyde and alcohol. The crude product was purified (SiO2, CH2Cl2/MeOH, 95:5) to obtain the aldehyde lxxii (0.6 g, 39%) as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.49 (s, 1H), 8.91 (dd, J=8.4, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 8.11 (dd, J=8.5, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 7.85 (ddd, J=8.4, 6.9, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (ddd, J=8.4, 6.9, 1. Hz, 1H), 4.17 (s, 3H).
    1.2 Preparation of Final Semicarbazone 1.1
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00061
  • A mixture of 200 mg (0.84 mmol) of the aldehyde lxxii (100 mg, 0.89 mmol, prepared in Example 1.1) of semicarbazide hydrochloride (Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis., USA), and 100 mg (0.72 mmol) of K2CO3 in 5 mL of EtOH was stirred in an oil bath at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was cooled and the precipitate was filtered, washed with water, and dried under vacuum to give the desired product 1.1 (170 mg). mp 236-237° C.; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.6 (s, 1H), 8.65 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.25 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 7.78 (br t, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (br t, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (br s, 2H), 4.15 (s, 3H); Anal. Calcd. for C15H14N6O: C, 61.22; H, 4.79; N, 28.55. Found: C, 61.12; H, 4.69; N, 28.35.
    1.3 Preparation of Final N-methylsemithiocarbazone 1.2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00062
  • A solution of the aldehyde lxxii (200 mg, 0.84 mmol, prepared in Example 1.1) and 2-methyl-3-thiosemicarbazide (84 mg, 0.84 mmol) in 3 mL of EtOH was stirred at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction brought to room temperature and the solid collected by filtration, washed with ethanol and water and dried to obtain the desired product 1.2 (130 mg) as a yellow solid. mp 229-230° C.; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.69 (br s, 1H) 8.60 (br s, 1H), 8.55 (s, 1H), 8.54 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.04 (d, J=7.4 Hz, 1H), (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.80 (br t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (br t, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 3.97 (s, 3H).
  • The following compounds were prepared in a similar manner, beginning with the corresponding esters prepared by Method B.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00063
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.54 (s, 1H). 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H) 8.40 (s, 1H), 8.28 (s, 1H), 8.05 (br s, 1H), 7.85 (br s, 1H), 6.82 (br s, 1H), 4.13 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 363.0 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00064
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 10.53 (s, 1H), 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 8.00 (s, 1H), 7.93 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 6.82 (broad s, 2H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 3.08 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 4H), 2.13 (m, 2H).
  • The following compounds were prepared by similar methods beginning with the corresponding esters prepared by Method D.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00065
  • The starting ester was reduced by the standard procedure described in Example 1.1 to afford a mixture of aldehyde and alcohol. The thiosemicarbazone was prepared from this mixture by using the standard procedure described in Example 1.3. The trityl-protected thiosemicarbazone lxxiv (12 mg, 0.02 mmol) was treated with TFA:DCM (1:1, 2 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 5 h, then concentrated in vacuo. Reverse phase HPLC afforded the desired product 1.5 (3 mg, 50%); 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.31-8.48 (m, 3H), 8.04-8.08 (m, 1H), 7.74-7.79 (m, 1H), 7.58-7.63 (m, 1H); ESI-MS m/z 297.0 (100, M+H+).
  • The following compound was prepared by the standard procedure (see synthesis of Examples 1.1 and 1.2), using an ester prepared according to Method E.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00066
  • The aldehyde was prepared by LAH reduction of the ester xxiii: 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 10.18 (s, 1H), 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 4.00 (s, 3H), 3.16-3.19 (m, 2H), 2.98-3.05 (m, 2H), 1.81-1.97 (m, 2H).
  • The semicarbazone was prepared by the standard procedure to provide 1.6: 1H NMR (MSO-d6) δ 10.45 (s, 1H). 8.09 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H) 7.67 (s, 1H), 7.57 (s, 1H), 7.65 (br s, 1H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 2.77-2.85 (m, 4H), 1.78-1.81 (m, 4H); ESI-MS m/z 299.1 (100, M+H+).
  • The compound below was prepared by the standard procedure (see Example 1.2) using an ester prepared according to Method F.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00067
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.57 (s, 1H), 8.50-8.52 (m, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 7.98-8.00 (m, 1H), 7.92 (m, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 7.55-7.57 (m, 2H), 3.97 (s, 3H).
  • The compound described below was prepared using the methods above beginning with the corresponding ester compound prepared according to Method G.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00068
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 10.48 (s, 1H), 9.74 (s, 1H), 8.79 (s, 1H), 8.40 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 2H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.93 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.83 (s, 2H), 4.17 (s, 3H).
  • The compound described below was prepared using the methods above beginning with the corresponding diol compound prepared according to Method H.
  • Preparation of 1.9.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00069
  • A mixture of the diol xxxi (100 mg, 0.32 mmol) and MnO2 (1.0 g) in 10 mL of THF was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. The reaction was filtered over Celite, the residue washed with THF and EtOAc, and the filtrate concentrated to give a solid. The crude was purified (SiO2, CH2Cl2/MeOH, 95:5) to give an intermediate aldehyde (50 mg, 50%) which was carried on directly.
  • A solution of the aldehyde (50 mg, 0.16 mmol) and 2-methyl-3-thiosemicarbazide (20 mg, 0.19 mmol) in 3 mL of EtOH was stirred at reflux for 18 h. The reaction brought to room temperature, the precipitate filtered, washed with EtOH, and dried to give the desired N-methyl semithiocarbazone 1.9 (28 mg, 44%). 192.6-194.7° C., 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.71 (br s, 1H), 8.59 (br s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 7.97 (d, J=1.o Hz, 1H), 7.96 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.67 (dd, J=8.6, 1.7 Hz, 1H), 4.41 (t, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.50-3.40 (m, 2H), 2.83 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.80-1.66 (m, 2H), 1.57-1.45 (m, 2H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00070
  • CaCl2 (−30+80 mesh, 34.1 mg, 0.308 mmol) and NaBH4 (23.3 mg, 0.616 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the crude saturated methyl ether xxxvi (125 mg, 0.308 mmol) in 1:1 THF-MeOH (10 mL) at 0° C. The cold bath was removed and stirring was continued for 1.5 h. Water (2 mL) was added and the solution was evaporated. The residue was dried under vacuum. To the residue THF (5 mL), CH2Cl2 (5 mL), and Dess-Martin periodinane (522 mg, 1.2 mmol) were added. The mixture was stirred for 1 h, diluted with THF (10 mL), and poured into saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (8 mL) containing Na2S2O3 (2.5 g). The mixture was stirred for 30 min. EtOAc (10 mL) was added, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried, and evaporated. Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave the aldehyde lxxv (95.2 mg in two steps) as a yellow solid: MS 378.2 (MH+).
  • Conversion of the aldehyde lxxv to compound 1.10 was accomplished using the methods provided above.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00071
  • Compound 1.10 was obtained as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.94(m, 2H), 2.98(t, 2H), 3.45(t, 2H), 3.92(s, 3H), 4.15(s, 3H), 7.89(s, 1H), 8.06(s, 1H), 8.32(s, 1H), 8.52(s, 1H), 8.59(s, 2H), 8.75(s, 1H); exact mass (electrospray) m/z calcd for C21H23F3N6OS (M+H) 465.2, found 465.2.
  • The following compounds were prepared using methods as provided above.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00072
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.64 (s, 1H). 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H) 8.25 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.65 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (br s, 1H), 4.45 (s, 1H), 4.13 (s, 3H). ESI-MS m/z 319.1 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00073
  • 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 8.51 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H) 8.23 (s, 1H), 7.96 (s, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 4.45 (s, 1H), 4.21 (s, 3H), 4.01 (s, 3H), 3.48-3.51 (m, 2H) 3.37 (s, 3H), 2.92-2.96 (m, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 1.94-1.98 (m, 2H); ESI-MS m/z 411.5 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00074
  • 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 9.04 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H) 8.33 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 4.39 (s, 3H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.54-3.71 (m, 6H, 2.92-2.96 (m, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 1.93-2.02 (m, 2H); ESI-MS m/z 441.2 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00075
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.92-7.97 (m, 3H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 3.83 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 1H), 3.58-3.75 (m, 2H), 2.75-2.85 (m, 2H), 1.98-2.21 (m, 2H), 1.70-1.80 (m, 2H), 1.48-1.62 (m, 2H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00076
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 8.76 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.41 (m, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.74-7.71 (m, 2H), 7.33 (dd, J=4.8, 7.7, 1H), 4.19 (s, 3H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.17 (m, 2H), 3.06 (m, 2H).
  • The following compounds were prepared from the corresponding ester (prepared by Method I).
  • Preparation of 1.16
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00077
  • To a solution of the ester xliii (250 mg, 0.78 mmol) in 5 mL of THF at −78° C. was added a 1.0 M solution of LiAlH4 (2 mL, 2 mmol) in THF. The reaction was stirred for 2 h and quenched with sat. NH4Cl, warmed to room temperature, and diluted with EtOAc. The solution was filtered, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to give the crude alcohol. A suspension of the alcohol and MnO2 (2.0 g) in 10 mL of THF was stirred at room temperature for 3 days. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite, the filtrate was concentrated, and the residue was purified (SiO2, CH2Cl2/MeOH, 96:4) to give an oil. This was triturated with hexane/EtOAc and the solid was filtered to give an intermediate aldehyde (60 mg, 26%).
  • A solution of the aldehyde (55 mg, 0.19 mmol) and 2-methyl-3-thiosemicarbazide (19 mg, 0.18 mmol) in 3 mL of EtOH was stirred at reflux for 18 h. The reaction was cooled, the precipitate collected, washed with EtOH, and dried to give the desired product 1.16 (30 mg, 42%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.72 (br s, 1H), 8.62 (br s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.01 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.48 (s, 1H), 7.76 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 4.14 (s, 3H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.14 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.98 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00078
  • CaCl2 (−30+80 mesh, 109 mg, 0.983 mmol) and NaBH4 (74.4 mg, 1.97 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the unsaturated nitrile (253 mg, 0.655 mmol) in 1:1 THF-EtOH (30 mL) at 0° C. The cold bath was removed and stirring was continued overnight. Water (2 mL) was added and the solution was evaporated. The residue was then dried under vacuum. To the residue THF (35 mL), CH2Cl2 (35 mL), and Dess-Martin periodinane (1.21 g, 2.86 mmol) were added. The mixture was stirred for 2 h, diluted with THF (30 mL), and poured into saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (48 mL) containing Na2S2O3 (12.1 g). The mixture was stirre for 30 min. EtOAc (10 mL) was added, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried, and evaporated. Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave the aldehyde lxxvi (111.3 mg in two steps) as a yellow solid: MS 359.1 (MH+).
  • Conversion of aldehyde lxxvi to compound 1.16a was accomplished using the methods described above.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00079
  • Compound 1.16a was obtained as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 3.03(t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.25(t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.99(s, 3H), 4.50(s, 3H), 7.89(s, 1H), 8.08(s, 1H), 8.37(s, 1H), 8.57(s, 1H), 8.48(s, 1H), 8.61(s, 1H), 8.66(s, 1H), 8.68(s, 1H), 8.76(s, 1H); MS (electrospray) m/z calcd for C20H18F8N7S (M+H) 446.1, found 446.1.
  • The following compounds were prepared according to the general methods above.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00080
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.69 (s, 1H). 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H) 8.40 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 7.95 (s, 1H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 7.83 (s, 1H) 4.13 (s, 3H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 3.12-3.15 (m, 2H), 2.93-2.96 (m, 2H), 2.54 (s, 3H); MS 392.1 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00081
  • Compound 1.17b was obtained as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 2.04(br s, 2H), 2.17(br s, 2H), 2.95(t, J=6.96 Hz, 2H), 3.17(br s, 2H), 3.36(t, J=6.96 Hz, 2H), 3.57(t, J=5.88 Hz, 2H), 3.87(br s, 2H), 4.41(s, 3H), 4.59(t, J=5.82 Hz, 2H), 8.28(s, 1H), 8.44(s, 1H), 8.45(s, 1H), 8.56(s, 1H), 8.70(s, 1H), 9.08(s, 1H); MS (electrospray) m/z calcd for C24H27ClN8O (M+H) 479.2, found 479.2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00082
  • Compound 1.17c was obtained as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 2.99(t, J=7.16 Hz, 2H), 3.24(t, J=7.14 Hz, 2H), 3.71(t, J=5.68 , 2H), 3.36(t, J=5.68 Hz, 2H), 4.13(s, 3H), 4.92(t, J=5.76 Hz, 2H), 7.88(s, 1H), 8.02(s, 1H), 8.16(s, 1H), 8.42(s, 1H), 8.46(s, 1H), 8.55(s, 1H), 8.74(s, 1H), 8.75(s, 1H); MS (electrospray) m/z calcd for C21H22ClN7OS (M+H) 456.1, found 456.2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00083
  • Compound 1.17d was obtained as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 2.49(s, 3H), 2.50(s, 3H), 2.99(t, J=7.14, 2H), 3.22(t, J=7.14 Hz, 2H), 3.28-3.30(m, 2H), 4.12(s, 3H), 4.82(t, J=6.56 Hz, 2H), 7.86(s, 1H), 8.02(s, 1H), 8.16(s, 1H), 8.43(s, 1H), 8.48(s, 1H), 8.55(s, 1H), 8.66(s, 1H), 8.73(s, 1H); MS (electrospray) m/z calcd for C22H25ClN8S (M+H) 469.2, found 469.2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00084
  • Compound 1.17e was obtained as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.92-1.65(m, 4H), 2.25(br, s, 1H), 2.36(s, 3H), 2.87(br s, 1H), 3.00(t, J=7.08 Hz, 2H), 3.09(br s, 1H), 3.19(m, 2H), 4.13(s, 3H), 4.61(br s, 1H), 4.93(m, 1H),7.86(s, 1H), 8.03(s, 1H), 8.17(s, 1H), 8.33(s, 1H), 8.48(s, 1H), 8.59(s, 1H), 8.69(s, 1H), 9.09(s, 1H); MS (electrospray) m/z calcd for C24H28ClN8S (M+H) 495.2, found 495.2
  • The following compounds were prepared beginning with intermediates provided above in Method J.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00085
  • To a solution of the above aldehyde xliii (34.8 mg, 0.133 mmol) in EtOH (2 mL) and H2O (0.5 mL) was added the semithiocarbazide (13.3 mg, 0.146 mmol) and 1 drop of AcOH. The mixture was refluxed overnight. The resulting mixture was cooled and the yellow solid filtered and washed with water. The solid was dried and found pure by TLC, NMR and MS. Yield of 1.18: 13.5 mg. (1H NMR, 400 MHz),: 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 4.15 (s, 3H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.95 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 8.32 (d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 8.40 (s, 1H), 8.58 (m, 3H), 8.85 (s, 1H), 11.75 (s, 1H). MS 334.1 (M−H−).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00086
  • From xlix, using the general method (Example 1.2).
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 11.72 (s, 1H), 8.83 (s, 1H), 8.56 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=8.7, 1H), 8.02 (s, 2H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 7.65 (dd, J=1.6, 8.7 Hz, 1H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 3.06 (s, 3H), 2.99 (s, 3H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00087
  • From intermediate 1, using the general method (Example 1.2).
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 8.63 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=8.8, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 8.11 (s, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 7.88 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (dd, J=10.6, 17.6 Hz, 1H), 6.83 (bs, 2H), 6.11 (d, J=17.6 Hz, 1H), 5.48 (d, J=10.6 Hz, 1H), 4.19 (s, 3H).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00088
  • From intermediate li, using the general method (Example 1.2).
  • 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) δ: 10.60 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 8.12 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (s, 1H),7.83 (s, 1H), 7.72. (s, 1H), 7.35 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (s, 2H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 2.15-2.17 (m, 1H), 1.08-1.12 (m, 2H), 0.86-0.88 (m, 2H).
  • The following compounds were prepared beginning with the corresponding esters prepared by Method K.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00089
  • The aldehyde lxxiii was formed by LAH reduction of the ester liii according to the general procedure (see Example 1). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 10.42 (s, 1H), 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.00-8.04 (m, 2H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=7 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 5.08 (q, J=6 Hz, 1H), 4.12 (s, 3H), 1.43-1.46 (m, 3H), 0.94 (s, 9H), 0.10 (s, 3H), 0.01 (s, 3H).
  • To a stirred solution of aldehyde lxxviii (38 mg, 0.096 mmol) in ethanol:water (5:1; 4 mL) was added semicarbazide hydrochloride (11 mg, 0.098 mmol) and sodium acetate (24 mg, 0.28 mmol). The mixture was heated at reflux for 12 h then allowed to cool to room temperature. The precipitate was collected and washed with water then dissolved in TFA (2 mL). The mixture was stirred for 36 h at room temperature then concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by reverse-phase HPLC to afford the desired product 1.22 (5 mg). 1H NMR (CD3OD) δ 9.07 (s, 1H). 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.42 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1), 8.14 (s, 1H), 7.74-7.77 (m, 1H), 5.07 (q, J=6 Hz, 1H), 4.43 (s, 3H), 1.55 (d, J=6 Hz, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 339.2 (100, M+H+).
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00090
  • LiAlH4 (1.0M in THF, 1.4 mL, 1.40 mmol) was added to a stirred and cooled (−78° C.) solution of the pentafluoroethyl compound liv (180 mg, 0.467 mmol) in THF (10 mL). Stirring was continued at −78° C. for 3 h. Water (0.1 mL), 2N NaOH (0.1 mL), and water (0.3 mL) were added sequentially. The cold bath was removed and the mixture was stirred for 30 min, and then filtered through a pad of Celite. The pad was rinsed with THF and the combined filtrates were evaporated. Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave the crude alcohol (104 mg) for next step.
  • Dess-Martin periodinane (246 mg, 0.580 mmol) was added to the alcohol (104 mg, 0.290 mmol) in 1:1 THF-CH2Cl2 (15 ML). The mixture was stirred for 2 h, diluted with TAF (30 mL), and poured into saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL) containing Na2S2O3 (2.5 g). The mixture was stirred for 30 min. EtOAc (10 mL) was added, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried, and evaporated. Flash chromatography of the residue over silica gel, using 1:4:5 MeOH-EtOAc-hexane, gave the aldehyde lxxvii (84.8 mg) as a yellow solid for the next final coupling reaction.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00091
  • NaOAc (30.1 mg, 0.367 mmol) was added to a stirred solution of the aldehyde lxxvii (43.5 mg, 0.123 mmol), semicarbazide hydrochloride (13.6 mg, 0.123 mmol) in 4:1 EtOH—H2O (4.5 mL), and the mixture was refluxed for 14 h. The resulting mixture was cooled and precipitates were collected. Purification by rinse with cold MeOH gave corresponding 7-pentafluoroethyl semicarbazone 1.23 (15.0 mg) as a yellow solid: 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 4.19(s, 3H), 6.85(br s, 2H), 7.88(d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 8.03(s, 1H), 8.15(s, 1H), 8.34(s, 1H), 8.52(s, 1H), 8.58(d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 8.61(s, 1H), 10.73(s, 1H); ms 413.1(M+H+).
  • The following compounds were prepared from the corresponding esters prepared by the methods of Method L.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00092
  • To a stirred solution of butyl ester lvi (152 mg, 0.5 mmol) in anhydrous THF (3 mL) at −78° C. under nitrogen was added lithium aluminum hydride (515 μl of a 1M solution in THF, 0.5 mmol). The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 30 min. then quenched by the addition of ethyl acetate (5 mL) and water (5 mL). The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and water (20 mL). The organics were collected and dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography afforded a mixture of alcohol and aldehyde which were taken up in THF (10 mL). Manganese dioxide (350 mg) was added and the mixture was stirred under nitrogen for 12 hours whereupon a further MnO2(350 mg) was added. The mixture was stirred for a further 3 h then filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford impure aldehyde lxxix (40 mg). ESI-MS m/z 224.3(100, M+H+).
  • To a stirred solution of aldehyde lxxix (40 mg, 0.17 mmol) in ethanol:water (5:1; 1 mL) was added thiosemicarbazide (20 mg, 1.2 eq.) and a drop of acetic acid. The mixture was heated at reflux for one hour then cooled and the precipitate collected by filtration and washed with water and cold ethanol to yield 1.24 (15 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 11.81 (s, 1H), 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.82 (s, 1H) 8.66 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H), 8.17-8.20 (m, 2H), 8.03-8.05 (m, 1H) 7.78-7.87 (m, 1H) 7.71-7.23 (m, 1H); ESI-MS m/z 297.3 (100, M+H+).
  • Similarly, the following compound was prepared according to the general procedure above.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00093
  • 1H NMR (MSO-d6) δ 11.76 (s, 1H), 9.55 (s, 1H) 8.94 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.54 (s, 1H), 8.33-8.39 (m, 3H), 8.08 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H), 7.89-7.93 (m, 1H), 7.76-7.78 (m, 1H); ESI-MS m/z 298.1 (100, M+H+).
  • The following compound was prepared from the aldehyde described in Method M.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00094
  • To a stirred solution of crude aldehyde lx was added thiosemicarbazide (33 mg, 0.3 mmol) and a drop of acetic acid. The mixture was heated at reflux for 90 min. then allowed to cool to room temperature. The precipitate formed was collected by filtration and purified by reverse-phase HPLC to afford the desired product 1.26 (10 mg); 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 11.98 (br s, 1H), 9.00 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.65 (br s, 1H) 8.50 (s, 1H) 7.86-7.99 (m, 5H) 7.67-7.72 (m, 1H) 4.15 (s, 3H); ESI-MS m/z 312.2 (100, M+H+).
  • The following compound was prepared from the aldehyde described in Method N.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00095
  • The solution of aldehyde lxiv was concentrated to a volume of approx. 1 mL then ethanol (5 mL) and water (1 mL) were added and the mixture concentrated again to approx. 1.5 mL. Ethanol (5 mL) was added and the mixture again concentrated to approx. 1.5 mL. Ethanol (2 mL) was added. To this'solution was added thiosemicarbazide (72 mg) and one drop of acetic acid. The mixture was heated at reflux for 12 h then concentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by reverse-phase preparative HPLC to afford isoquinoline 1.27 (2 mg, 0.8%); 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 11.92 (br s, 1H), 9.07 (d, 1H, J=8 Hz), 8.70 (s, 1H) 8.61 (br s, 1H) 8.48 (s, 1H) 7.88-8.11 (m, 6H).
  • The following compound was prepared in a similar manner from the aldehyde described in Method O.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00096
  • 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 4.00 (s, 3H), 4.19 (s, 3H), 5.60 (s, 2H), 8.15 (br s, 2H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.64 (s,1H), 8.80 (s, 1H). ms 348.0 (M+H+).
    • Example 2
  • This example illustrates the preparation of a 2-triazolyl-quinoline semithiocarbazone.
  • 2.1 Preparation of 2-carboxaldehydequinoline-4-carboxylic acid, methyl ester.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00097
  • A solution of the quinoline ester lxxx (1.35 g, 6.7 mmol) in dioxane was heated to reflux. SeO2 (1.49 g, 13.4 mmol) was added and the reflux continued for 30 min. The reaction was cooled, diluted with Et2O, filtered, and the ethereal phase was washed with water, 10% NaHCO3 (2×), brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness to give the aldehyde lxxxi as a solid (1.25 g, 87%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.16 (s, 1H), 8.73 (dd, J=8.3, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 8.35 (dd, J=8.1, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H), 8.02 (ddd, J=8.4, 6.9, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (ddd, J=8.5, 6.9, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 4.03 (s, 3H).
  • 2.2 Preparation of Intermediate lxxxii.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00098
  • To a solution of the aldehyde lxxxi (1.25 g, 5.81 mmol) and sulfamic acid (1.35 g, 14.53 mmol) in 20 mL of t-butanol was added a solution of NaClO2 (1.30 g, 14.53 mmol) and KH2 PO4 (1.97 g, 14.53 mmol) in 2 mL of water. The bi-phased reaction was stirred vigorously for 30 min. The reaction was quenched with AcOH (3.1 mL) and diluted with water. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (2×), and the organic layer washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to dryness to give an intermediate carboxylic acid (1.24 g, 93%).
  • To a solution of the carboxylic acid (1.24 g, 5.4 mmol) and DMF (0.61 mL, 7.87 mmol) in 10 mL of CH2Cl2 at 0° C. was added oxalyl chloride (1.46 mL, 16.7 mmol) dropwise. The reaction was stirred at 0° C. for 15 min and room temperature for 30 min. The solvent was removed in vacuum to dryness to give a yellow solid. The crude product was cooled to 0  C. and added a solution of 4-methyl-3-thiosemicarbazide (1.65 g, 15.76 mmol) in 15 mL of pyridine. The suspension was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min and at room temperature for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated and a solution of EtOAc/hex ,(1:1) added. The reddish precipitate was collected by filtration and dried to give the desired product lxxxii (1.6 g) slightly impure. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.87 (s, 1H), 0.94 (s, 1H), 8.71 (d, J=8.6 Hz, 1H); 8.84 (s, 1H), 8.24 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.1 (br s, 1H), 7.99 (br t, J=8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.88 (br t, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 4.03 (s, 3H).
  • 2.3 Preparation of 4-methyl-3-thiomethyl-1,2,4-triazo-5-yl-quinoline-4-carboxylic acid methyl ester.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00099
  • Sodium metal (0.92 g, 40.2 mmol) was dissolved in 30 mL of dry MeOH. Intermediate lxxxii (1.6 g) was added and the reaction was refluxed for 18 h. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, the solvent was removed and the solid residue dissolved in water. The aqueous solution was acidified to pH 4-5 with 10% HCl, a solid precipitated which was collected by filtration, washed with water, and dried to give a triazolethione intermediate (1.09 g).
  • To a suspension of the triazolethione (1.09 g, 3.36 mmol) was added a 1.0 N solution of NaOH (3.63 mL, 3.63 mmol) and stirred for 10 min. Methyl iodide (0.24 mL, 3.8 mmol) was added and the reaction stirred for 18 h. The reaction was filtered and the filtrate concentrated to give the desired product lxxxiii. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.74 (br d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (s, 1H), 8.02 (br d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (ddd, J=8.3, 6.8, 1.8 Hz, 1H), 7.56 (ddd, 8.3, 6.8, 1.3 Hz, 1H), 4.11 (s, 3H), 2.72 (s, 3H).
  • 2.4 Preparation of Semithiocarbazone 2.1.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00100
  • To a solution of the acid lxxxiii (750 mg, 2.5 mmol) in 20 mL of MeOH was added 2.0 mL of conc. H2SO4. The reaction was refluxed for 18 h. The reaction was cooled, the solvent removed in the rotavap, the residue diluted with water and the aqueous layer neutralized with solid K2CO3 to pH 8. The aqueous solution was extracted with EtOAc (3×) and CH2Cl2 (x). The organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated to give the corresponding methyl ester (500 mg).
  • A suspension of the ester (500 mg) and Raney Ni (75 mg) in 30 mL of EtOH was refluxed for 18 h. The reaction was cooled, filtered through Celite, and the filtrate was concentrated to give the desired product (300 mg).
  • The methyl ester (300 mg, 0.95 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of THF and cooled to −78° C. A 1.0 M solution of LiAlH4 (3.0 mL, 3.0 mmol) in THF was added and the reaction was stirred until the ester was consumed (by TLC). The reaction quenched with 10% NH4Cl at −78° C., brought to room temperature and aqueous extracted with EtOAc (3×). Organic layer dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated to dryness to give the desired alcohol (150 mg).
  • A suspension of the crude product (150 mg) and MnO2 (750 mg) in 20 mL of THF was stirred at room temperature for 18 h. The suspension filtered through Celite, washed with EtOAc, and filtrate concentrated to dryness to give the desired aldehyde (60 mg).
  • A solution of the aldehyde (60 mg, 0.25 mmol) and semithiocarbazide (23 mg, 0.25 mmol) in 3 mL of EtOH was stirred at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction cooled to room temperature, precipitate filtered, and dried to obtain the desired semithiocarbazone (19.2 mg). MS(ES) 312 (M++1).
    • Example 3
  • The following compounds were all prepared by similar methods to those described in Examples 1 and 2.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00101
    Compound Y R1 R6 R7
    3.1 S CH3 —CH═CHCN CH3
    3.2 S CH3 —CH═CHCN H
    3.3 S CH3 —CH2CH2CN H
    3.4 S H —CH2CH2CN H
    3.5 O H —CH═CHCN CH3
    3.6 S H —CH═CHCN CH3
    3.7 S CH3 —CH2CH2CN CH3
    3.8 S H —CH2CH2CN CH3
    3.9 S H —CH2CH2CN CF3
    3.10 S CH3 —CH2CH2CN CF3
    3.11 S n-butyl —CH2CH2CN CH3
    3.12 S CH3 CH2CH2CN —CH2CH3
    3.13 S CH3 CH2CH2SO2CH3 CH3
    3.14 S CH3 —CH2CH2CN Cl
    3.15 S CH3 —CH2CH2SO2CH3 CF3
    3.16 S CH3CH2— —CH2CH2CN Cl
    3.17 S CF3CH2— —CH2CH2CN Cl
    3.18 S CH3CH2— —CH2CH2CN CF3
    3.19 S CH3 —CH2CH2CN —CH2CH2CH3
    3.20 S CH3 —CH2CH2SO2CH3 Cl
    3.21 S 2-methoxyethyl —CH2CH2CN CF3
    3.22 S 2-(4- —CH2CH2CN Cl
    morpholinyl)ethyl
    3.23 S 2-methoxyethyl —CH2CH2CN Cl
    3.24 S 2-(4- —CH2CH2CN H
    morpholinyl)ethyl
    3.25 S tetrahydrofuran-3- —CH2CH2CN H
    ylmethyl
    3.26 S cyclopropylmethyl —CH2CH2CN H
    3.27 S 2-(N,N-dimethyl- —CH2CH2CN H
    amino)ethyl
    3.28 S 2-(N,N-dimethyl- —CH2CH2CN CF3
    amino)ethyl
    3.29 S 2-(4- —CH2CH2CN CF3
    morpholinyl)ethyl
    3.30 S 3-hydroxypropyl —CH2CH2CN H
    3.31 S 2-hydroxyethyl —CH2CH2CN H
    3.32 S 2-(methoxy- —CH2CH2CN H
    carbonyl)ethyl
    3.33 S 2-hydroxypropyl —CH2CH2CN H
    3.34 S 2-(methyl- —CH2CH2CN H
    sulfonyl)ethyl
    3.35 S 2-(2-methoxy —CH2CH2CN CF3
    ethoxy)ethyl
    3.36 S 2,3- —CH2CH2CN CF3
    dihydroxypropyl
    3.37 S 2-(1- —CH2CH2CN CF3
    pyrrolidinyl)ethyl
    3.38 S 2-(N,N-dimethyl- —CH2CH2CN Cl
    amino)ethyl
    3.39 S 2-(1- —CH2CH2CN Cl
    pyrrolidinyl)ethyl
    3.40 S H —CH2CH2CN H
    3.41 S 2-(2-methoxy —CH2CH2CN H
    ethoxy)ethyl
    3.42 S CH3CH2 —CH2CH2CN H
    3.43 S CF3CH2 —CH2CH2CN H
    3.44 S 3-(1-piperidinyl)- —CH2CH2CN H
    prop-1-yl
    3.45 S 2-aminoethyl —CH2CH2CN H
    3.46 S 3-(N,N-dimethyl- —CH2CH2CN Cl
    amino)prop-1-yl
    3.47 S 3-(N,N-dimethyl- —CH2CH2CN H
    aniino)prop-1-yl
    3.48 S H F H
    3.49 S H CH3 H
    3.50 S CH3 F H
    3.51 S CH3 CH3 H
    3.52 S H CH3O— H
    3.53 O CH3 CH3O— H
    3.54 O CH3 H H
    3.55 S H Ph H
    3.56 O H Ph H
    3.57 O H CH3O— H
    3.58 S H I H
    3.59 O H I H
    3.60 O H CN H
    3.61 S H —CH═CH2 H
    3.62 S H H CH3
    3.63 O H H CH3
    3.64 O H —CH═CH2 H
    3.65 S H 3-hydroxy- H
    propyn-1-yl
    3.66 S H Cl H
    3.67 O H Cl H
    3.68 S H 3-pyridyl H
    3.69 S H 2-thienyl H
    3.70 O H 3-hydroxy- H
    propyn-1-yl
    3.71 O H CH3S— H
    3.72 O H CH3SO2— H
    3.73 O H H CH3O—
    3.74 O H H CH3S—
    3.75 O H H CH3SO2—
    3.76 O H H Cl
    3.77 O H H F
    3.78 S H H Cl
    3.79 NH H H H
    3.80 S H H Br
    3.81 O H H Br
    3.82 S H H F
    3.83 S H H (CH3)2CH—
    3.84 S CH3 H Cl
    3.85 O H 1-methyl- H
    imidazol-5-yl
    3.86 O H —CH═CHCONH2 H
    3.87 O CH3 H Cl
    3.88 O H H (CH3)2CH—
    3.89 O H methylenedioxy
    3.90 S CH3 H CH3
    3.91 O H NH2 H
    3.92 O H —CH═CHCN H
    3.93 S H CH3 CH3
    3.94 O H CH3 CH3
    3.95 S H CH3 Cl
    3.96 O H CH3 Cl
    3.97 O H —CH2CH2CN H
    3.98 S n-butyl H H
    3.99 S CH3 CH3 CH3
    3.100 S benzyl H H
    3.101 S CF3CH2— H H
    3.102 S CH3 2-(4-morpholin- H
    yl)ethoxy
    3.103 O H Cl CH3
    3.104 S H Cl CH3
    3.105 S CH3 Cl CH3
    3.106 S H 2-(4-morpholin- H
    yl)ethoxy
    3.107 S 2-phenylethyl H H
    3.108 S CH3 —CH2CH2CN H
    3.109 S H CH3SO2CH═CH H
    —
    3.110 S n-butyl H Cl
    3.111 S CH3 1,2-dihydroxy- H
    ethyl
    3.112 S CH3 CH3SO2CH═CH H
    —
    3.113 S CH3 3-hydroxy- H
    prop-1-yl
    3.114 O H 4-hydroxy- H
    but-1-yl
    3.115 O H CH3SO2CH═CH H
    —
    3.116 S CH3 CH3SO2CH2CH2 H
    —
    3.117 O H CH3SO2CH2CH2 H
    —
    3.118 S CH3 4-hydroxy- H
    but-1-yn-1-yl
    3.119 O H 4-hydroxy- H
    but-1-yn-1-yl
    3.120 S CH3 4-morpholinyl H
    3.121 S CH3 3-hydroxy-1- H
    propenyl
    3.122 S n-butyl —CH2CH2CN H
    3.123 S H 1,2-dihydroxy- H
    ethyl
    3.124 S H CH3SO2CH2CH2 H
    —
    3.125 S CH3 CH3SO2CH2CH2 CH3
    —
    3.126 S CH3 2-(5-oxazolyl)- H
    ethyl
    • Example 4
  • The following compounds were all prepared by similar methods to those described in Examples 1 and 2.
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00102
    Compound Y Z B-ring
    4.1 S —NHCH3
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00103
    4.2 S NH2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00104
    4.3 S NH2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00105
    4.4 O NH2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00106
    4.5 O NH2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00107
    4.6 O H
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00108
    4.7 O CH3
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00109
    4.8 S NH2
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00110
  • The following compounds have also been prepared:
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00111
    • Example 5
  • 5.1 Preparation of Hydrazine b
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00112
  • To a solution of 3-methyl-1,3-butanediol (Fluka, 6.14 mL, 57.6 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) at 0° C. under an atmosphere of nitrogen was added triethylamine (10 mL). p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride (11 g) in DCM (20 mL) was added dropwise over 4 h and the mixture was stirred for a further 3 h at 0° C., then allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (50 mL) and the organics were separated, washed with 1M HCl (50 mL), sat. aq. NaHCO3 (50 mL) and water (20 mL). The organics were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to afford tosylate a (13.4 g) as a white solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.81 (d, J=8 Hz, 2H), 7.37 (d, J=8 Hz, 2H), 4.22 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.47 (s, 3H), 1.88 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.23 (s, 6H).
  • To a solution of tosylate a (6.55 g, 25 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was added hydrazine monohydrate (15 mL) and the mixture was heated to 60° C. for 2 h then concentrated to approx. 10 mL volume. Saturated aq. sodium hydroxide (20 mL) and THF (50 mL) were added and the organics collected, dried (NaSO4), filtered and concentrated to afford hydrazine b (1.8 g) as a colorless oil. ESI-MS m/z 119.3 (100, M+H+). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 4.73 (s, 1H), 3.19 (s, 3H), 3.02-3.06 (m, 2H), 1.68 (t, J=6 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (s, 6H).
  • 5.2 Preparation of Semithiocarbazone 5
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00113
  • To a stirred solution of hydrazine b (0.8 g, 6.8 mmol) in diethyl ether (25 mL) was added triphenylmethylisothiocyanate (Trans World Chemicals, 1.83 g, 6.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and then hexanes (5 mL) was added and the mixture was filtered to afford semithiocarbazide c as a white solid (0.62 g). 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 9.51(s, 1H), 7.21-7.36 (m, 15H), 4.27 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 4.01 (s, 2H), 2.43 (s, 1H), 1.82 (t, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 1.26 (s, 6H).
  • To semithiocarbazide c (284 mg, 0.68 mmol) was added TFA:DCM/1:1 (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h then concentrated in vacuo. Methanol (5 mL) was added and the mixture re-concentrated. This step was repeated 3 times until a white powder was obtained. Ethanol:water 4:1 (5 mL) and aldehyde C (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) (199 mg, 0.61 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture was warmed to 65° C. overnight then cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo. Flash chromatography of the residue (DCM:MeOH:NH3/98:1:1 to 96:3:1; gradient elution) afforded the semithiocarbazone 5 as a yellow solid. ESI-MS m/z 484.1 (100, M+H+). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.72 (s, 1H), 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.60 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 8.07 (s, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.79 (s, 2H), 4.15 (s, 3H), 3.24 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.98 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.73 (t, J=8 Hz, 2H), 1.27 (s, 6H).
    • Example 6
  • 6.1a Preparation of 1-Methyl-2-piperidinemethanol (d)
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00114
  • To a solution of 1-methyl-2-piperidinemethanol (20.75 mg, 160.6 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (100 mL) was added dropwise SOCl2 (17.6 mL, 241 mmol). The solution was heated to reflux for 12 h. The solution was then concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 20 g which was used without further purification in the next step. The crude material was dissolved in EtOH (100 mL) and NH2NH2 (80 mL. 1.6 mol) was added. The solution was then heated to reflux for 12 h, cooled to room temperature and conc. NaOH solution (10 eq) was added, stirred for 1 h and extracted with ether. After evaporation of the ethereal layer the residue was distilled (reduced pressure) two fractions were recovered. Fraction 1 (95° C., 7.38 g). Fraction 2 (95-98° C., 1.39 g). The hydrazine (1.07 g, 7.5 mmol) was dissolved in THF (8 mL) and triphenylnethylisocyanate (2.16 g, 7.58 mmol) was added slowly. The solution was then stirred overnight and the product collected by filtration to provide 420 mg of the desired product as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.10 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.56 (m, 4H), 1.95 (t, 1H), 2.15 (s, 1H), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.71(d, 1H), 3.25 (q, 1H), 3.55 (q, 1H), 4.80(s, 2H), 7.12-7.32 (m, 15H), 8.02 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 429.4 (100, M+H).
    6.1b Preparation of (R)-(+)-1-Methyl-2-piperidinemethanol ((R)-d)
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00115
  • Following the known procedure of patent EP 0 429 984 A2 (reference example 8). The resolution was identical to the above given procedure except that 4 rounds of crystallization were performed instead of the two as sited above. To a mixture of (±)-1-methyl-2-piperidinemethanol (77 g, 596 mmol) in EtOH (615 mL) was added dibenzoyl-D-tartaric acid (205 g, 573 mmol). The resulting mixture was slowly heated until a solution was obtained at which time the solution was slowly cooled with gentle stirring. After 12 h the crystals were isolated and dried to afford 131.6 g. This process was repeated: (2) EtOH (533 mL) provided 92.5 g. (3) EtOH (225 mL) provided 68 g (4) EtOH (200 mL) provided 49 g. The resulting salt was treated with 3M HCl (200 mL) which was heated to induce it to dissolve. The still warm solution was poured into a separatory funnel and extracted with ethyl acetate. The remaining aqueous layer was adjusted to pH 10 with K2CO3. The solution was extracted with CH2Cl2, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give 12 g of the alcohol. This alcohol (12 g, 92.8 mmol) was suspended in CH2Cl2 (200 mL) and SOCl2 added. After stirring for 12 h, the solvent was removed to provide a crude HCl salt. This salt was dissolved in EtOH (100 mL) and treated with NH2NH2 (89 mL, 1.86 mol) and heated to reflux for 12 h. NaOH (74 g) in H2O (30 mL) was added and stirred for 1 h. Half the solvent was removed and the residue extracted with ether to give a crude oil. After distillation under reduced pressure (50-60° C.) the pure hydrazine product (4.87 g) was obtained. This hydrazine (1.6 g, 11.2 mmol) was dissolved in THF (10 mL) and triphenylmethylisocyanate (3.19 g, 11.2 mmol) was added slowly. The solution was then stirred overnight and filtered to provide 650 mg of the desired product in good purity. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 1.10 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.56 (m, 4H), 1.95 (t, 1H), 2.15 (s, 1H), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.71 (d, 1H), 3.25 (q, 1H), 3.55(q, 1H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 7.12-7.32 (m, 15H), 8.02 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 429.2 (100, M+H).
    6.1c Preparation of (S)-(−)-1-Methyl-2-piperidinemethanol ((S)-d)
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00116
  • Following the known procedure of patent EP 0 429 984 A2 (reference example 8). The resolution was identical to the procedure described above except 3 rounds of crystallization were performed. To a mixture of (±)-1-methyl-2-piperidinemethanol (95.6 g, 740 mmol) in EtOH (840 mL) was added dibenzoyl-L-tartaric acid (255 g, 711 mmol). The resulting mixture was slowly heated until a solution was obtained at which time the solution was slowly cooled with gentle stirring. After 12 h the crystals were isolated and dried to provide 79.6 g. This process was repeated: (2) ETOH (335 mL) provided 50.4 g. (3) EtOH (345 mL) provided 35 g. The resulting salt was treated with 3M HCl (134 mL) which was heated to induce it to dissolve. The still warm solution was poured into a separatory funnel and extracted with ethyl acetate. The remaining aqueous layer was adjusted to pH 10 with K2CO3. The solution was extracted with CH2Cl2, dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give 6 g of the alcohol. This alcohol (6 g, 46.7 mmol) was suspended in CH2Cl2 (100 mL) and SOCl2 (6.8 mL, 93.3 mmol) added dropwise. After stirring for 12 h, the solvent was removed to provide a crude HCl salt. This salt (5.98 g) was dissolved in EtOH (100 mL) and treated with NH2NH2 (19.5 mL, 405 mmol) and heated to reflux for 3 h. Half the solvent was removed, the residue extracted with ether and the extracts dried and concentrated to give 4.55 g of a crude oil. This crude hydrazine (2.01 g, 14.06 mmol) was dissolved in THF (100 mL) and triphenylmethylisocyanate (4.0 g, 14.1 mmol) was added slowly. The solution was then stirred overnight and the solvent removed under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by flash chromatography (CH2Cl2/MeOH/NH4OH) to provide 350 mg of the desired product. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.10 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.56 (m, 4H), 1.95 (t, 1H), 2.15 (s, 1H), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.71 (d, 1H), 3.25 (q, 1H), 3.55 (q, 1H), 4.80 (s, 2H), 7.12-7.32 (m, 15H), 8.02 (s, H). ESI-MS m/z 429.2 (100, M+H).
    6.2a. Preparation of Semicarbazide 6
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00117
  • Compound 6 was prepared from carbazide d and aldehyde C (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) by the procedure described in Example 5. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.10-1.20 (m, 2H), 1.49 (m, 3H), 1.65 (m, 1H), 2.15 (t, 1H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.83 (d, 1H), 3.00 (t, 2H), 3.23 (t, 2H), 4.09 (s, 1H) 4.13 (s, 3H), 4.23 (q, 1H), 4.31 (q, 1H), 6.80-7.40 (s, 2H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 493.2 (100, M+H).
    6.2b Preparation of Semicarbazide (S)-(−)-6
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00118
  • Compound (S)-(−)-6 was prepared from carbazide (S)-d and aldehyde C (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) by the procedure described in Example 5. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.10-1.30 (m, 2H), 1.49 (m, 3H), 1.64 (m, 1H), 2.09 (t, 1H), 2.38 (s, 1H), 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.83 (d, 1H), 3.00 (dd, 2H), 3.23 (dd, 2H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 4.18 (q, 1H), 4.31 (q, 1H), 6.90 (s, 1H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s,1H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 493.2 (100, M+H).
    6.2c Preparation of Semicarbazide (R)-(+)-6
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00119
  • Compound (R)-(+)-6 was prepared from carbazide (R)-d and aldehyde C (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) by the procedure described in Example 5. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.10-1.30 (m, 2H), 1.49 (m, 3H), 1.64 (m, 1H), 2.09 (t, 1H), 2.38 (s, 1H), 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.83 (d, 1H), 3.00 (dd, 2H), 3.23 (dd, 2H), 4.13 (s, 3H), 4.18 (q, 1H), 4.31 (q, 1H), 6.90 (s, 1H), 7.30 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.38 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z493.2 (100, M+H).
    • Example 7
  • 7.1 Preparation of Ester f
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00120
  • A suspension of zinc metal (1.70 g, 26.2 mmol) in THF (2 mL) containing 1,2-dibromoethane (190 mg, 1.0 mmol) was heated to 65° C. for one minute, cooled to room temperature and treated with TMSCl (0.10 mL, 0.80 mmol). After 15 min at room temperature, a warm solution of 4-iodomethyltetrahydropyran (5.65 g, 25.0 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added dropwise. Upon completion of the addition, the reaction mixture was heated to 40° C. for 12 h and then cooled to room temperature. The resulting clear solution was transferred via cannula to a solution of iodoquinoline e (2.0 g, 5.0 mmol) in THF (100 mL) containing (dppf)2PdCl2 (600 mg) and heated to reflux for 10 h. The reaction mixture was treated with aq. disodium EDTA, extracted with DCM (4×100 mL) and dried (Na2SO4). Concentration followed by flash chromatography (EtOAc:hexanes:MeOH/4:4:1) afforded f as a yellow solid (1.28 g). MS (M+1)+: 380. 1H NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.51 (s, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 7.90 (s, 1H), 4.34 (s, 3H), 4.07 (s, 3H), 3.97 (dd, J=11.0, 2.7 Hz, 2H), 3.35 (t, J=10.1 Hz, 2H), 2.79 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 1.80-1.90 (m, 1H), 1.60-1.63 (m, 2H), 1.40-1.50 (m, 2H).
    7.2 Preparation of Semithiocarbazone 7
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00121
  • Ester f was converted into compound 7. MS (M+1)+: 494. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.69 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.92 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 4.75-4.85 (m, 2H), 4.11 (s, 3H), 3.80-3.83 (m, 2H), 3.20-3.24 (m, 2H), 2.73 (d, J=6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.34 (s, 6H), 1.77-1.85 (m, 1H), 1.33-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.29-1.32 (m, 2H).
    • Example 8
  • Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00122
  • Compound 8 was prepared from 2-hydroxypropylhydrazine (obtained following the method of Gever J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1954, 76, 1283) and aldehyde C (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) following the methods in Example 5. MS (M+1)+: 456. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ 8.91 (s, 1H), 8.68 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 8.01 (s, 1H), 7.86 (s, 1H), 5.13 (d, J=4.6 Hz, 1H), 4.81-4.88 (m, 1H), 4.42-4.48 (m, 1H), 4.15-4.19 (m, 1H), 4.12 (s, 3H), 3.23 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 2.96 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 2H), 1.20 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 3H).
    • Example 9
  • Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00123
  • Compound 9 was obtained as a yellow solid. ESI-MS m/z 530.3 (100, M+H+). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.75 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 4.76 (t, J=6 Hz, 2H), 4.14 (s, 3H), 3.38-3.48 (m, 2H), 3.19-3.27 (m, 2H), 3.08 (s, 3H), 2.71 (t, J=6 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (q, J=7 Hz, 4H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 1.05 (t, J=7 Hz, 6H).
    • Example 10
  • 10.1 Preparation of Hydrazine h
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00124
  • To a stirred solution of R-(−)-1,3-butanediol (Aldrich, 5.00 g, 55.5 mmol) in dichloromethane (20 mL) at −20° C. under an atmosphere of nitrogen was added triethylamine (10 mL). p-Toluenesulfonyl chloride (10.6 g) in a solution in dichloromethane (30 mL) was added dropwise over 2 h and the mixture was stirred for a further 2 h at −20° C. then allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The mixture was diluted with water (50 mL) and the organics were separated, washed with 1M HCl (50 mL), sat. aq. sodium bicarbonate (50 mL) and brine (20 mL). The organics were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to afford the crude tosylate g. Tosylate g was added dropwise over 30 min to a stirred solution of hydrazine monohydrate (30 mL) and ethanol (30 mL) at 75° C. The mixture was stirred at 75° C. overnight and then concentrated in vacuo. Water (20 mL) was added and the mixture extracted with DCM by continuous extraction for 48 h. The organics extracts were concentrated in vacuo to afford hydrazine h (3.0 g for 2 steps) as a colorless oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 3.95-3.98 (m, 2H), 3.43 (br s, 4H), 2.97-3.04 (m, 2H), 1.61-1.68 (m, 2H), 1.91-1.20 (s, 3H). ESI-MS m/z 105.2 (100, M+H+).
    10.2 Preparation of Semithiocarbazone 10
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00125
  • Hydrazine h and aldehyde M (prepared from 6-chloro-5-iodo-isatin by Method I and Method A) were converted in to semithiocarbazone 10 as described in Example 5. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 1.19 (d, J=7 Hz, 3H), 1.55-1.85 (m, 2H), 2.98 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 3.23 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 3.75-3.85 (m, 1H), 4.14 (s, 3H), 4.55-4.69 (m, 1H), 4.80-4.95 (m, 1H), 5.02 (d, J=4 Hz, 1H) 7.39 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.40 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 1H), 8.59 (s, 1H), 8.73 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 450.2 (100, M+H+).
    • Example 11
  • 11.1 Preparation of Acid j
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00126
  • To a stirred solution of isatin i (30.0 g, 96.7 mmol) in glacial acetic acid (500 mL) at room temperature was added malonic acid (104 g, 387 mmol). The mixture was heated at 100° C. for 18 h then cooled to room temperature, filtered and washed with acetone (3×100 mL) to yield acid j as an orange solid (14.4 g). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 12.18 (s, 1H), 8.82 (s, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 6.92 (s, 1H).
    11.2 Preparation of Ester k
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00127
  • To a stirred solution of acid j (9.0 g, 26 mmol) and K2CO3 (5.3 g, 39 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (200 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen was added iodoethane (8.0 g, 52 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h then poured into saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (250 mL), filtered and washed with H2O g(3×150 mL) to yield ester k as a brown solid (7.0 g, 72%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.65 (s, 1H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 6.98 (s, 1H) 4.20 (q, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.18 (t, J=7 Hz, 3H).
    11.3 Preparation of Chloride l
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00128
  • To a stirred solution of ester k (10.0 g, 26.5 mmol) in toluene (300 mL) was added phosphorous oxychloride (16.2 g, 106 mmol). The mixture was heated to 100° C. under an atmosphere of nitrogen for 18 h then allowed to cool to room temperature, poured into ice water (500 mL), filtered and washed with H2O (2×250 mL) to yield chloride l as a brown solid (5.3 g). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 9.25 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 4.43 (q, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.38 (t, J=7 Hz, 3H). ESI-MS: m/z 395.9 (100%, M+H+).
    11.4 Preparation of Intermediate m
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00129
  • To a stirred solution of chloride l (4.0 g, 10 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (15 mL) was added imidazole (3.4 g, 51 mmol) and the mixture heated at 140° C. for 18 h under an atmosphere of nitrogen. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and then concentrated in vacuo to afford a dark oil. The residue was dissolved in CHCl3 (150 mL) washed with H2O, saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (eluting with 2% MeOH in DCM) to yield m as a red brown solid (3.5 g, 81%). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 9.17 (s, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.39 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 4.56 (q, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.48 (t, J=7 Hz, 3H).
    11.5 Preparation of Intermediate n
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00130
  • To a stirred solution of m (2.0 g, 4.7 mmol), Pd(OAc)2 (210 mg, 0.94 mmol) and tri-o-tolylphosphine (640 mg, 2.16 mmol) in 1:1/triethylamine:DMF (20 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen at room temperature was added acrylonitrile (1.24 g, 23.4 mmol). The mixture was heated to 60° C. for 18 h, cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo and the residue purified by flash chromatography (gradient elution 0 to 5% MeOH in DCM) to yield product n (730 mg) as a yellow solid and a mixture of 1:5 cis:trans isomers. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 9.15 (cis, s, 2H), 8.85 (trans, s, 2H), 8.45 (cis, s, 1H), 8.42 (trans, s, 1H), 8.29 (cis, s, 1H), 8.25-8.20 (cis+trans, m, 1H cis, 2H trans), 8.00 (trans, d, J=16 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (cis, d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (cis+trans, s, 1H cis, 1H trans), 6.62 (trans, d, J=16 Hz, 1H), 6.3(cis, d, J=12 Hz, 1H), 4.58-4.5 (cis+trans, m, 2H cis, 2H trans), 1.5-1.41 (cis+trans, m, 3H cis, 3H trans).
    11.6 Preparation of Intermediate o
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00131
  • To a stirred solution of n (740 mg, 2.10 mmol) in DME (10 mL) and MeOH (1 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen at room temperature was added sodium borohydride powder (800 mg, 21.0 mmol) portionwise over 1 h. The mixture was allowed to stir for 20 h then cooled to 0° C., quenched with 1N NaOH (10 mL), diluted with H2O (10 mL) and allowed to stir at room temperature for 2 h. The mixture was filtered, and the filtrate extracted with 10% isopropyl alcohol in DCM (×3). The organics were combined, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (gradient elution 0 to 5% MeOH in DCM) to yield alcohol o as a pale yellow solid (260 mg). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 5.08 (s, 2H), 3.25 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.99 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H). ESI-MS m/z 313.0 (100%, M+H+).
    11.7 Preparation of Intermediate p
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00132
  • To a stirred solution of alcohol o (260 mg, 0.83 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) under an atmosphere of nitrogen at room temperature was added Dess-Martin periodinane (707 mg, 1.66 mmol). After 2 h the mixture was diluted with 5 mL saturated ammonium chloride solution and extracted with DCM (3×). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium thiosulfate solution (2×10 mL), H2O, brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (gradient elution 0 to 5% MeOH in DCM) to yield 80 mg of aldehyde p as a yellow solid.
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 10.52 (s, 1H), 8.96 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1H), 7.95 (s, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.38 (s, 1H), 3.34 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.81 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H).
    11.8 Preparation of Semiothiocarbazone 11
    Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00133
  • Compound 11 was prepared following the procedure described in Example 5. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 8.32 (s, 1H), 8.86 (s, 1H), 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.61 (s, 1H), 8.5 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1H), 8.32 (s, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 7.44 (s, 1H), 5.05 (s, 1H), 4.81-4.79 (m, 2H), 3.24 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 2.99 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.72 (t, J=7 Hz, 2H), 1.28 (s, 6H). ESI-MS m/z 470.2 (150, M+H+)
    • Example 12
  • This example provides an assay that is useful in evaluating and selecting a compound that modulates IKK.
  • Assay Protocol for Measuring IKKβ Enzyme Inhibition
  • 96 well polystyrene microtiter plates were coated with Neutravidin (10 μg/mL in PBS, overnight at 4° C.). The coating solution was removed and in 80 μL/well a kinase reaction mixture was added (20 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 10 mM MgC2, 2 mM EGTA, 1 mM NaF, 0.5 mM benzamidine, 1 mM DTT, 0.1% NP-40, 10 μM ATP, 1 μM of biotinylated substrate peptide KKERLLDDRHDSGLDSMKDEEYEQGK-bio, sequence derived from IκBα). In 10 μL/well in DMSO test compounds were added covering a final concentration range from 1 nM to 30 μM. Recombinant full-length IKKβ enzyme produced in a baculovirus system in insect cells was added in 10 μL buffer containing Tris-HCl pH 7.5 20 mM, EGTA 2 mM, benzamidine 0.5 mM, DTT 1 mM, NP-40 0.1%, MgCl2 10 mM to initiate the kinase reaction. The reaction mixture was incubated at room temperature for 45 min. During this incubation the substrate peptide gets phosphorylated by IKKβ and gets captured onto the well's surface by Neutravidin. The plate was washed 3× with 150 μL distilled water to terminate the reaction and remove components of the reaction mixture.
  • A conventional chemiluminescent ELISA detection technique was initiated by adding 100 μL/well primary antibody (custom-made monoclonal antibody generated to recognize the phosphorylated epitope in the substrate peptide; used at 1:10,000 dilution) premixed with horseradish peroxidase (HRP) conjugated anti-mouse secondary antibody (commercially available from several sources; used at 1:10,000 dilution) in PBS containing 2% BSA. The solution was incubated at room temperature for 40 min on a shaker, then washed 3× with 150 μL of water. 100 μL well 10× diluted SuperSignal HRP substrate (from Pierce) was added and after 5 min incubation the chemiluminescent signal was captured by a Labsystems LuminoSkan luminometer. The point of 50% inhibition of IKKβ enzyme activity (IC50) was determined by curve fitting with the LSW data analysis software (MDL, San Leandro, Calif.).
  • The compounds provided in Examples 1-4 all displayed IC50 values of less than or equal to about 30 μM in the above assay.
  • All publications and patent applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. Although the foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.

Claims (101)

1. A compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00134
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
Y is selected from the group consisting of O, S and N(R);
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl;
Z is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl and NR2R3;
R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl ring;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
2. A compound of claim 1, wherein W is N and X is CH.
3. A compound of claim 1, wherein W is N and X is N.
4. A compound of claim 1, wherein W is CH and X is N.
5. A compound of claim 1, wherein W is CH and X is CH.
6. A compound of claim 2, wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of O and S.
7. A compound of claim 2, wherein Y is O.
8. A compound of claim 2, wherein Y is S.
9. A compound of claim 2, wherein Z is NR2R3.
10. A compound of claim 6, wherein R4 is H.
11. A compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00135
12. A compound of claim 1, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00136
wherein
R5, R6, R7 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CF3, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, cyano, nitro, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl (C1-C6)alkyl, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, SO2NH2, SO2NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, SO2N—[(C1-C6)alkyl]2 and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy; or two adjacent R groups selected from R5, R6, R7 and R8, can be linked together to form a new 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
13. A compound of claim 12, wherein W is N; X is CH; Y is O or S; and A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00137
14. A compound of claim 1, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
15. A compound of claim 1, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
16. A compound of claim 1, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
17. A compound of claim 1, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
18. A compound of claim 13, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
19. A compound of claim 13, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
20. A compound of claim 13, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
21. A compound of claim 13, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
22. A compound of claim 1, wherein W is N; X is CH; Y is O or S; Z is H, CH3, NH2 or NHCH3; R1 is H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, or perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; R4 is H; A represents
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00138
wherein R6 and R7 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl and cyano; and B is a five-membered aromatic ring system containing at least one nitrogen atom.
23. A compound of claim 22, wherein Y is S.
24. A compound of claim 22, wherein Z is NR2R3.
25. A compound of claim 22, wherein Z is NH2.
26. A compound of claim 22, wherein R1 is (C1-C6)alkyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl or (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl.
27. A compound of claim 22, wherein B is a five-membered aromatic ring system containing 1-2 nitrogen atoms and 0-1 sulfur atoms.
28. A compound of claim 27, wherein B is unsubstituted or substituted by (C1-C3)alkyl, CF3, cyano, or halogen.
29. A compound of claim 22, wherein Z is NH2; R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl and cyano, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl and heteroalkyl groups optionally bear additional substituents selected from cyano, carboxamido,(C1-C3)alkylsulfonyl or (C1-C3)alkoxy; and R7 is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl and cyano.
30. A compound of claim 29, wherein R6 is selected from the group consisting of CH2(CH2)mCN, CH2(CH2)nSO2CH3 and CH2(CH2)nOCH3, wherein the subscript n is an integer from 0 to 2.
31. A compound of claim 29, wherein R6 is
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00139
32. A compound of claim 29, wherein R7 is selected from H, halogen, CF3 and (C1-C4)alkyl.
33. A compound of claim 29, wherein R7 is methyl.
34. A compound of claim 1, having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00140
wherein Y is O, S or N—CN; W′ is N(CH3), N(CF3), N(CH2CH3), O or S; the subscripts n and n′ are independently integers from 0 to 3; R7 is H, halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C4)alkyl, (C2-C4)alkenyl, (C2-C4)alkynyl, (C1-C4)heteroalkyl or cyano; R9 is CN, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)heteroalkyl]2, S(O)n″-(C1-C6)alkyl, S(O)n″-(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, (C1-C6)alkoxy or (C3-C6)cycloheteroalkyl, wherein each n″ is independently an integer of 0 to 2; R1 is NH2, NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, NH—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, N[(C1-C6)heteroalkyl]2, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, S(O)n″-(C1-C6)alkyl, S(O)n″-(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, O—(C1-C6)alkyl, O—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl or (C3-C8)cycloheteroalkyl; and R11 is H, CF3, NH2, NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, halogen or (C1-C3)alkyl.
35. A compound of claim 34, wherein Y is O or S; W′ is N—CH3; n is 2; n′ is 1-3; R9 is cyano, CONH2, SO2-(C1-C6)alkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy or (C3-C6)cycloheteroalkyl; R10 is NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, NH—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, N[(C1-C6)heteroalkyl]2, O—(C1-C6)alkyl, O—(C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy or (C3-C8)cycloheteroalkyl; and R11 is H.
36. A compound of claim 22, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
37. A compound of claim 22, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
38. A compound of claim 22, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
39. A compound of claim 22, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
40. A compound of claim 1, wherein Y is S; Z is NH2 and R1 is (C1-C6)alkyl.
41. A compound of claim 40, wherein R1 is methyl.
42. A compound of claim 1, wherein said compound is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00141
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00142
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00143
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00144
43. A composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient and a compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00145
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
Y is selected from the group consisting of O, S and N(R);
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl;
Z is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl and NR2R3;
R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C2-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; and wherein when Y is N(R), R and R1 are optionally combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
44. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein W is N and X is CH.
45. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein W is N and X is N.
46. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein W is CH and X is N.
47. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein W is CH and X is CH.
48. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of O and S.
49. A composition in accordance claim 43, wherein Y is O.
50. A composition in accordance claim 43, wherein Y is S.
51. A composition in accordance claim 43, wherein Z is NR2R3.
52. A composition in accordance with claim 48, wherein R4 is H.
53. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00146
54. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of.
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00147
wherein
R5, R6, R7 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CF3, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, cyano, nitro, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C3-C6)alkoxycarbonylalkyl, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, SO2NH2, SO2NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, SO2N—[(C1-C6)alkyl]2 and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy; or two adjacent R groups can be linked together to form a new 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
55. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein W is N; X is CH; Y is O or S; and A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00148
56. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
57. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
58. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4 methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
59. A composition in accordance with claim 43, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
60. A composition in accordance with claim 55, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
61. A composition in accordance with claim 55, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
62. A composition in accordance with claim 55, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
63. A composition in accordance with claim 55, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
64. A method for treating an inflammatory, metabolic or malignant condition, said method comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment, an effective amount of a compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00149
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
Y is selected from the group consisting of O, S and N(R);
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl;
Z is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl and NR2R3;
R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C2-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; and wherein when Y is N(R), R and R1 are optionally combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
65. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein W is N and X is CH.
66. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein W is N and X is N.
67. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein W is CH and X is N.
68. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein W is CH and X is CH.
69. A method in accordance with claim 65, wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of O and S.
70. A method in accordance with claim 65, wherein Y is O.
71. A method in accordance with claim 65, wherein Y is S.
72. A method in accordance with claim 65, wherein Z is NR2R3.
73. A method in accordance with claim 69, wherein R4 is H.
74. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00150
75. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00151
wherein
R5, R6, R7 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CF3, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloaklyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, cyano, nitro, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C3-C6)alkoxycarbonylalkyl, CONH2, CO—NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, CO—N[(C1-C6)alkyl]2, SO2NH2, SO2NH—(C1-C6)alkyl, SO2N—[(C1-C6)alkyl]2 and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy; or two adjacent R groups can be linked together to form a new 5- or 6-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
76. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein W is N; X is CH; Y is O or S; and A is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00152
77. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
78. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
79. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
80. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
81. A method in accordance with claim 76, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
82. A method in accordance with claim 76, wherein B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
83. A method in accordance with claim 76, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
84. A method in accordance with claim 76, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of substituted or unsubstituted imidazolyl, substituted or unsubstituted thiazolyl and substituted or unsubstituted triazolyl.
85. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein said compound is administered orally.
86. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein said compound is administered topically.
87. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein said compound is administered intravenously or intramuscularly.
88. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein said compound is administered in combination with a second therapeutic agent, said second therapeutic agent being a member selected from the group consisting of prednisone, dexamethasone, beclomethasone, methylprednisone, betamethasone, hydrocortisone, methotrexate, cyclosporin, rapamycin, tacrolimus, antihistamine drugs, TNF antibodies, IL-1 antibodies, soluble TNF receptors, soluble IL-1 receptors, TNF or IL-1 receptor antagonists, non-steroidal antiinflammatory agents, COX-2 inhibitors, antidiabetic agents, and anticancer agents.
89. A method in accordance with claim 88, wherein said administering is sequential.
90. A method in accordance with claim 64, wherein said inflammatory, metabolic or malignant condition is selected from the group consisting of rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, psoriasis, cancer, diabetes and septic shock.
91. A method for treating a condition or disorder mediated by IKK, comprising
administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00153
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
Y is selected from the group consisting of O, S and N(R);
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl;
Z is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl and NR2R3;
R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of H. (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl ring;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
92. A method for modulating IKK, comprising contacting a cell with a compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00154
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
Y is selected from the group consisting of O, S and N(R);
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl;
Z is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl and NR2R3;
R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C1-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C1-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl ring;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or in substituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
93. The method of claim 92, wherein said compound is an IKK inhibitor.
94. The method of claim 92, wherein said compound is an IKK activator.
95. A method for the preparation of antiinflammation agents comprising contacting a precursor compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00155
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy
with a compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00156
wherein
Y is selected from the group consisting of O, S and N(R);
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of H, CN, NO2, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl and (C2-C10)alkynyl;
Z is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl and NR2R3;
R1, R2 and R3 are independently selected .from the group consisting of H, (C1-C10)alkyl, (C3-C10)alkenyl, (C2-C10)alkynyl, (C2-C10)heteroalkyl, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, aryl(C1-C4)alkyl, aryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)alkyl, heteroaryl(C2-C4)heteroalkyl and perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl; and wherein when Z is NR2R3, R2 and R3 can be combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; and wherein when Y is N(R), R and R1 are optionally combined to form a 5- to 7-membered ring;
under conditions sufficient to produce compounds having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00157
wherein each of A, B, R1, R4, W, X, Y and Z have the meanings provided above.
96. A compound having the formula:
Figure US20070135464A1-20070614-C00158
wherein
W and X are independently selected from the group consisting of N and CH;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, (C1-C6)alkyl, (C3-C6)cycloalkyl, (C4-C7)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl and (C2-C6)alkynyl;
A is a substituted or unsubstituted fused carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system, said ring system being mono- or bicyclic wherein said mono- or bicyclic rings are selected from the group consisting of five- and six-membered rings that are aromatic or partially or completely saturated; and
B is a substituted or unsubstituted five- or six-membered ring which is aromatic or partially or completely saturated, containing at least one nitrogen atom, and from 0 to 3 additional heteroatoms, wherein the B ring substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, CF3, CF3O, (C1-C6)alkyl, perfluoro(C1-C6)alkyl, (C2-C6)alkenyl, (C2-C6)alkynyl, (C1-C6)heteroalkyl, (C1-C6)alkoxy, (C1-C6)thioalkoxy, amino, (C1-C6)alkylamino, di(C1-C6)alkylamino, (C3-C10)cycloalkyl, (C4-C10)cycloalkyl-alkyl, (C3-C10)cycloheteroalkyl, cyano, nitro, sulfonamido, (C1-C6)acyl, (C1-C6)acylamino, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-C6)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-C6)alkyl, carboxamido and (C1-C6)heteroalkoxy.
97. A compound of claim 96, wherein R4 is hydrogen.
98. A compound of claim 96, wherein R4 is hydrogen, Y is O or S, and Z is NR2R3.
99. A compound of claim 96, wherein R4 is hydrogen, Y is O or S, Z is NR2R3, and B contains a nitrogen atom at a position two atoms away from the atom attaching B to the remainder of the molecule.
100. A compound of claim 96, B contains a nitrogen atom at the point of attachment of B to the remainder of the molecule.
101. A compound of claim 99, wherein B is selected from the group consisting of 1-methylimidazol-5-yl, 1-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-5-yl, 5-methylimidazol-1-yl, 5-(trifluoromethyl)imidazol-1-yl, thiazol-5-yl, imidazol-1-yl, 1-methyl-1,3,4-triazolyl, and 4-methyl-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl.
US11/650,268 2000-10-26 2007-01-05 Antiinflammation agents Abandoned US20070135464A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/650,268 US20070135464A1 (en) 2000-10-26 2007-01-05 Antiinflammation agents

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US24358100P 2000-10-26 2000-10-26
US10/004,287 US6846834B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2001-10-23 Antiinflammation agents
US10/928,784 US7186841B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2004-08-26 Antiinflammation agents
US11/650,268 US20070135464A1 (en) 2000-10-26 2007-01-05 Antiinflammation agents

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/928,784 Continuation US7186841B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2004-08-26 Antiinflammation agents

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20070135464A1 true US20070135464A1 (en) 2007-06-14

Family

ID=22919310

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/004,287 Expired - Fee Related US6846834B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2001-10-23 Antiinflammation agents
US10/928,784 Expired - Fee Related US7186841B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2004-08-26 Antiinflammation agents
US11/650,268 Abandoned US20070135464A1 (en) 2000-10-26 2007-01-05 Antiinflammation agents

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/004,287 Expired - Fee Related US6846834B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2001-10-23 Antiinflammation agents
US10/928,784 Expired - Fee Related US7186841B2 (en) 2000-10-26 2004-08-26 Antiinflammation agents

Country Status (20)

Country Link
US (3) US6846834B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1333834B1 (en)
JP (1) JP4285602B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20030064773A (en)
CN (1) CN1503673A (en)
AR (1) AR035499A1 (en)
AT (1) ATE392898T1 (en)
AU (2) AU3980602A (en)
BR (1) BR0114978A (en)
CA (1) CA2427284A1 (en)
DE (1) DE60133758T2 (en)
EA (1) EA200300508A1 (en)
ES (1) ES2305125T3 (en)
IL (1) IL155519A0 (en)
MX (1) MXPA03003599A (en)
NO (1) NO20031869L (en)
NZ (1) NZ525474A (en)
PL (1) PL366114A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2002041843A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200303203B (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9133166B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-09-15 Quanticel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9676770B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2017-06-13 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9896436B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2018-02-20 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
WO2020176349A1 (en) * 2019-02-25 2020-09-03 The Regents Of The University Of California Nnythiosemicarbazone compounds and uses thereof

Families Citing this family (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2307278A1 (en) * 2000-04-28 2001-10-28 University Of British Columbia Use of n-heterocyclic substituted salicylic acids for inhibition of cellular uptake of cystine
MXPA03003599A (en) 2000-10-26 2003-08-01 Tularik Inc Antiinflammation agents.
CN1582284A (en) * 2001-11-07 2005-02-16 霍夫曼-拉罗奇有限公司 Aminopyrimidines and pyridines
WO2003048152A2 (en) 2001-12-05 2003-06-12 Tularik Inc. Inflammation modulators
ATE415966T1 (en) 2002-06-06 2008-12-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma SUBSTITUTED 3-AMINO-THIENO(2,3-B)PYRIDINE-2-AMIDES AND PRODUCTION PROCESS AND THEIR USE
EP1556053A4 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-04-19 Amgen Inc Antiinflammation agents
US7521062B2 (en) 2002-12-27 2009-04-21 Novartis Vaccines & Diagnostics, Inc. Thiosemicarbazones as anti-virals and immunopotentiators
JP2007533602A (en) 2003-07-31 2007-11-22 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Substituted benzothiophene compounds and their use
GB0400895D0 (en) * 2004-01-15 2004-02-18 Smithkline Beecham Corp Chemical compounds
PE20060373A1 (en) 2004-06-24 2006-04-29 Smithkline Beecham Corp 3-PIPERIDINYL-7-CARBOXAMIDE-INDAZOLE DERIVATIVES AS INHIBITORS OF IKK2 KINASE ACTIVITY
PE20060748A1 (en) 2004-09-21 2006-10-01 Smithkline Beecham Corp INDOLCARBOXAMIDE DERIVATIVES AS KINASE INHIBITORS IKK2
JP5253159B2 (en) * 2005-06-24 2013-07-31 デューク・ユニヴァーシティ Direct drug delivery system based on thermoresponsive biopolymer
MX2007016541A (en) 2005-06-30 2008-03-07 Smithkline Beecham Corp Chemical compounds.
US8063071B2 (en) 2007-10-31 2011-11-22 GlaxoSmithKline, LLC Chemical compounds
GB0523576D0 (en) * 2005-11-18 2005-12-28 Theradeas Ltd Drug composition and its use in therapy
JP2009516702A (en) * 2005-11-18 2009-04-23 スミスクライン・ビーチャム・コーポレイション Compound
CA2653654A1 (en) 2006-06-06 2007-12-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Substituted 3-amino-thieno[2,3-b] pyridine-2-carboxamide compounds, their preparation and use
DE102007012794B3 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-06-19 Novaled Ag New pyrido(3,2-h)quinazoline compounds useful to prepare doped organic semi-conductor, which is useful in an organic light-emitting diode, preferably organic solar cells, and modules for an electronic circuits, preferably displays
PE20081889A1 (en) 2007-03-23 2009-03-05 Smithkline Beecham Corp INDOL CARBOXAMIDES AS INHIBITORS OF IKK2
JP2010529031A (en) * 2007-05-29 2010-08-26 グラクソスミスクライン・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Naphthyridine derivatives as PI3 kinase inhibitors
US11969501B2 (en) 2008-04-21 2024-04-30 Dompé Farmaceutici S.P.A. Auris formulations for treating otic diseases and conditions
KR20160029870A (en) 2008-04-21 2016-03-15 오토노미, 인코포레이티드 Auris formulations for treating otic diseases and conditions
KR101323448B1 (en) 2008-10-02 2013-11-27 아사히 가세이 파마 가부시키가이샤 8-substituted isoquinoline derivative and use thereof
WO2010102968A1 (en) 2009-03-10 2010-09-16 Glaxo Group Limited Indole derivatives as ikk2 inhibitors
US11192859B2 (en) * 2016-04-18 2021-12-07 New York University Quinoline compounds as modulators of RAGE activity and uses thereof
AU2017290256A1 (en) 2016-06-29 2019-01-17 Otonomy, Inc. Triglyceride otic formulations and uses thereof
WO2024072870A1 (en) * 2022-09-28 2024-04-04 New York University Quinoline compounds as modulators of rage activity and uses thereof
CN118852160A (en) * 2024-09-24 2024-10-29 世华合创生物技术开发(山东)有限公司 A tricyclic amide compound, preparation method and application thereof

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6207679B1 (en) * 1997-06-19 2001-03-27 Sepracor, Inc. Antimicrobial agents uses and compositions related thereto
US6258822B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-07-10 Abbott Laboratories Urokinase inhibitors
US6613942B1 (en) * 1997-07-01 2003-09-02 Novo Nordisk A/S Glucagon antagonists/inverse agonists

Family Cites Families (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB9317987D0 (en) * 1993-08-26 1993-10-13 Glaxo Group Ltd Chemical compounds
DE69829048T2 (en) * 1997-04-22 2006-02-09 Euro-Celtique S.A. THE USE OF CARBOXYCLIC AND HETEROCYCLIC RESIDUES SUBSTITUTED SEMICARBAZONES AND THIOSEMICARBAZONES AS SODIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS
US5843721A (en) * 1997-07-03 1998-12-01 Tularik Inc. Nucleic acids encoding human NIK protein
ES2246240T3 (en) 1999-06-23 2006-02-16 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh SUBSTITUTED BENCIMIDAZOLS.
DE19951360A1 (en) 1999-10-26 2001-05-03 Aventis Pharma Gmbh Substituted indoles
GB0003154D0 (en) 2000-02-12 2000-04-05 Astrazeneca Uk Ltd Novel compounds
WO2001068648A1 (en) 2000-03-15 2001-09-20 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Substituted beta-carbolines with ikb-kinase inhibiting activity
JP4272338B2 (en) 2000-09-22 2009-06-03 バイエル アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Pyridine derivatives
AU2002211827B2 (en) 2000-10-03 2006-12-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Amino-substituted tetracyclic compounds useful as anti-inflammatory agents and pharmaceutical compositions comprising same
WO2002030353A2 (en) 2000-10-12 2002-04-18 Smithkline Beecham Corporation NF-λB INHIBITORS
AU2002211662A1 (en) 2000-10-12 2002-04-22 Smith Kline Beecham Corporation Nf-kappab inhibitors
MXPA03003599A (en) 2000-10-26 2003-08-01 Tularik Inc Antiinflammation agents.
JP2002193938A (en) 2000-12-01 2002-07-10 Bayer Ag 4-arylpyridine derivative
US7122544B2 (en) 2000-12-06 2006-10-17 Signal Pharmaceuticals, Llc Anilinopyrimidine derivatives as IKK inhibitors and compositions and methods related thereto
AU2002247059B2 (en) 2001-02-01 2006-11-16 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Method of treating inflammatory and immune diseases using inhibitors of IkappaB kinase (IKK)
WO2002076985A1 (en) 2001-03-23 2002-10-03 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Compounds useful as kinase inhibitors for the treatment of hyperproliferative diseases

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6207679B1 (en) * 1997-06-19 2001-03-27 Sepracor, Inc. Antimicrobial agents uses and compositions related thereto
US6613942B1 (en) * 1997-07-01 2003-09-02 Novo Nordisk A/S Glucagon antagonists/inverse agonists
US6258822B1 (en) * 1997-08-06 2001-07-10 Abbott Laboratories Urokinase inhibitors

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9133166B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-09-15 Quanticel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9527829B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-12-27 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9701657B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-07-11 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9963441B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-05-08 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10273222B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-04-30 Celgene Quantscel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9676770B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2017-06-13 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US9896436B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2018-02-20 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10071984B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2018-09-11 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
US10174003B2 (en) 2014-09-16 2019-01-08 Celgene Quanticel Research, Inc. Histone demethylase inhibitors
WO2020176349A1 (en) * 2019-02-25 2020-09-03 The Regents Of The University Of California Nnythiosemicarbazone compounds and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
NO20031869L (en) 2003-06-26
KR20030064773A (en) 2003-08-02
NZ525474A (en) 2005-10-28
ZA200303203B (en) 2004-04-26
JP4285602B2 (en) 2009-06-24
US20020161004A1 (en) 2002-10-31
BR0114978A (en) 2004-04-20
IL155519A0 (en) 2003-11-23
NO20031869D0 (en) 2003-04-25
US6846834B2 (en) 2005-01-25
AU2002239806B8 (en) 2002-06-03
WO2002041843A3 (en) 2003-02-06
PL366114A1 (en) 2005-01-24
ATE392898T1 (en) 2008-05-15
AU2002239806B2 (en) 2007-01-18
CA2427284A1 (en) 2002-05-30
EP1333834A4 (en) 2007-01-17
JP2004516252A (en) 2004-06-03
MXPA03003599A (en) 2003-08-01
WO2002041843A2 (en) 2002-05-30
ES2305125T3 (en) 2008-11-01
EP1333834A2 (en) 2003-08-13
US20050043330A1 (en) 2005-02-24
EP1333834B1 (en) 2008-04-23
CN1503673A (en) 2004-06-09
AU3980602A (en) 2002-06-03
AR035499A1 (en) 2004-06-02
DE60133758T2 (en) 2009-07-02
US7186841B2 (en) 2007-03-06
EA200300508A1 (en) 2004-06-24
DE60133758D1 (en) 2008-06-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6846834B2 (en) Antiinflammation agents
US6846828B2 (en) Aminopyrimidine and aminopyridine anti-inflammation agents
AU2002239806A1 (en) Antiinflammation agents
US7176314B2 (en) Inflammation modulators
JP4616831B2 (en) Inhibitor of AKT activity
EP2137183B1 (en) Aminopyrimidines useful as inhibitors of protein kinases
US8278337B2 (en) Substituted pyridines that are JNK inhibitors
US20090069319A1 (en) Imidazopyridine analogs and their use as agonists of the wnt-beta-catenin cellular messaging system
US20110034441A1 (en) Indazoles as wnt/b-catenin signaling pathway inhibitors and therapeutic uses thereof
MX2013005454A (en) Nampt and rock inhibitors.
US7425640B2 (en) Substituted 5-carboxyamide pyrazoles and [1,2,4]triazoles as antiviral agents
US8063061B2 (en) 6-heteroarylpyridoindolone derivatives, their preparation and therapeutic use thereof
US20060041137A1 (en) Kinase inhibitors
AU2002350657A1 (en) Aminopyrimidines and pyridines

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务，不要输入任何密码和下载